LG Electronics USA L602I PCS GSM Phone User Manual L601i E 047 056

LG Electronics USA PCS GSM Phone L601i E 047 056

UserManual.wiki >

LG Electronics USA >

L602I User Manual >

Users Manual 1 HTML Version

1. Users Manual 1
2. Users Manual 2

Users Manual 1

Part 15.21 statement

" Change or Modifications that are not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void

the user's authority to operate the equipment. "

Part 15.105 statement

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device,

pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a

residential installation.

This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used

in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. if this

equipment does cause harmful interference or television reception, which can be determined by

turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or

more of the following measures:

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to

which the receiver is connected

- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT

1. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS:

LG offers you a limited warranty that the enclosed subscriber unit and its enclosed accessories will be

free from defects in material and workmanship, according to the following terms and conditions:

(1) The limited warranty for the product extends for ONE (1) year beginning on the data of purchase

of the product.

(2) The limited warranty extends on to the original purchaser of the product and is not assignable or

transferable to any subsequent purchaser/end user.

(3) This warranty is good only to the original purchaser of the product during the warranty period as

long as it is in the U.S., including Alaska, Hawaii, U.S. Territories and Canada.

(4) The external housing and cosmetic parts shall not be covered under these limited warranty terms.

(5) Upon request from LG, the consumer must provide information to reasonably prove the date of

purchase.

(6) The customer shall bear the cost of shipping the product to the Customer Service Department of

LG. LG shall bear the cost of shipping the product back to the consumer after the completion of

service under this limited warranty.

2. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:

(1) Defects or damages resulting from use of the product in other than its normal and customary

manner.

(2) Defects or damages from abnormal use, abnormal conditions, improper storage, exposure to

moisture or dampness, unauthorized modifications, unauthorized connections, unauthorized repair,

misuse, neglect, abuse, accident, alteration, improper installation, or other acts which are not the

fault of LG, including damage caused by shipping blown fuses spills of food or liquid.

(3) Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material or workmanship.

(4) That the Customer Service Department at LG was net notified by consumer of the alleged defect

or malfunction of the product during the applicable limited warranty period.

(5) Products which have had the serial number removed or made illegible.

(6) The limited warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied either in fact or by

operations law, statutory or otherwise, including, but limited to any implied warranty of

marketability or fitness for a particular use.

(7) Damage resulting from use of non-LG approved accessories.

(8) All plastic surfaces and all other externally exposed parts that are scratched or damaged due to

normal customer use.

(9) Products operated outside published maximum ratings.

(10) Products used or obtained in a rental program.

(11) Consumables (such as fuses).

3. STATE LAW RIGHTS:

No other express warranty is applicable to this product. THE DURATION OF ANY IMPLIED

WARRANTIES, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MARKETABILITY, IS LIMITED

TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY HEREIN. LG INFOCOMM INC. SHALL

NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE LOSS OF THE USE OF THE PRODUCT, INCONVENIENCE, LOSS

OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES, DIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL, RISING OUT OF THE USE OF,

OR INABILITY TO USE, THIS PRODUCT OR FOR ANY BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR

IMPLIED WARRANTY, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MARKETABILITY

APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT. Some states do not allow the exclusive of imitation of incidental

or consequential damages or limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts; so these limitations or

exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have

other rights which vary from state to state.

4. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:

To obtain warranty service, please call the following web address:

www.lgeservice.com

For Your Safety

Important Information

This user guide contains important information on the use and

operation of this phone. Please read all the information

carefully for optimal performance and to prevent any damage

to or misuse of the phone. Any changes or modifications not

expressly approved in this user guide could void your warranty

for this equipment.

Before You Start

Safety Instructions

WARNING! To reduce the possibility of electric shock, do not

expose your phone to high humidity areas, such as the

bathroom, swimming pool, etc.

Always store your phone away from heat. Never store your

phone in settings that may expose it to temperatures less than

32°F or greater than 104°F, such as outside during extreme

weather conditions or in your car on a hot day. Exposure to

excessive cold or heat will result in malfunction, damage

and/or catastrophic failure.

Be careful when using your phone near other electronic

devices. RF emissions from your mobile phone may affect

nearby in adequately shielded electronic equipment. You

should consult with manufacturers of any personal medical

devices such as pacemakers and hearing aides to determine if

they are susceptible to interference from your mobile phone.

Turn off your phone in a medical facility or at a gas station.

Never place your phone in a microwave oven as this will

cause the battery to explode.

IMPORTANT! Please read the TIA SAFETY INFORMATION on

page 78 before using your phone.

Safety Information

Read these simple guidelines. Breaking the rules may be

dangerous or illegal. Further detailed information is given in this

user guide.

]Never use an unapproved battery since this could damage

the phone and/or battery and could cause the battery to

explode.

]Never place your phone in a microwave oven as it will

cause the battery to explode.

]Do not dispose of your battery by fire or with hazardous or

flammable materials.

]Make sure that no sharp-edged items come into contact

with the battery. There is a risk of this causing a fire.

]Store the battery in a place out of reach of children.

]Be careful that children do not swallow any parts such as

rubber plugs (earphone, connection parts of the phone,

etc.). This could cause asphyxiation or suffocation.

For Your Safety

]Unplug the power cord and charger during lightning storms

to avoid electric shock or fire.

]When riding in a car, do not leave your phone or set up the

hands-free kit near to the air bag. If wireless equipment is

improperly installed and the air bag is activated, you may be

seriously injured.

]Do not use a hand-held phone while driving.

]Do not use the phone in areas where its use is prohibited.

(For example: aircraft).

]Do not expose the battery charger or adapter to direct

sunlight or use it in places with high humidity, such as a

bathroom.

]Never store your phone in temperatures less than- 4°F or

greater than 122°F.

]Do not use harsh chemicals (such as alcohol, benzene,

thinners, etc.) or detergents to clean your phone. There is a

risk of this causing a fire.

]Do not drop, strike, or shake your phone severely. Such

actions may harm the internal circuit boards of the phone.

]Do not use your phone in high explosive areas as the phone

may generate sparks.

]Do not damage the power cord by bending, twisting, pulling,

or heating. Do not use the plug if it is loose as it may cause

a fire or electric shock.

]Do not place any heavy items on the power cord. Do not

allow the power cord to be crimped as it may cause fire or

electric shock.

]Do not handle the phone with wet hands while it is being

charged. It may cause an electric shock or seriously

damage your phone.

]Do not disassemble the phone.

]Do not place or answer calls while charging the phone as it

may short-circuit the phone and/or cause electric shock or

fire.

]Only use the batteries, antennas, and chargers provided by

LG. The warranty will not be applied to products provided by

other suppliers.

]Only authorized personnel should service the phone and its

accessories. Faulty installation or service may result in

accidents and consequently invalidate the warranty.

]Do not hold or let the antenna come in contact with your

body during a call.

]An emergency call can be made only within a service area.

For an emergency call, make sure that you are within a

service area and that the phone is turned on.

For Your Safety

FCC RF Exposure Information

WARNING! Read this information before operating the phone.

In August 1996, the Federal Communications (FCC) of he United

States, with its action in Report and Order FCC 96-326, adopted

an updated safety standard for human exposure to radio

frequency (RF) electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC

regulated transmitters. Those guidelines are consistent with

the safety standard previously set by both U.S. and

international standards bodies.

The design of this phone complies with the FCC guidelines and

these international standards.

CAUTION

Use only the supplied and approved antenna. Use of

unauthorized antennas or modifications could impair call

quality, damage the phone, void your warranty and/or result in

violation of FCC regulations. Do not use the phone with a

damaged antenna. If a damaged antenna comes into contact

with skin, a minor burn may result. Contact your local dealer

for a replacement antenna.

Body-worn Operation

This device was tested for typical body-worn operations with

the back of the phone kept 0.6 inches (1.5cm) between the

user’s body and the back of the phone. To comply with FCC RF

exposure requirements, a minimum separation distance of 0.6

inches(1.5cm) must be maintained between the user's body

and the back of the phone. Third-party belt-clips, holsters, and

similar accessories containing metallic components should not

be used. Body-worn accessories that cannot maintain 0.6

inches(1.5cm) separation distance between the user's body

and the back of the phone, and have not been tested for typical

body-worn operations may not comply with FCC RF exposure

limits and should be avoided.

For Your Safety

Vehicle Mounted External Antenna

(optional, if available)

A minimum separation distance of 8 inches (20cm) must be

maintained between the user/bystander and the vehicle

mounted external antenna to satisfy FCC RF exposure

requirements. For more information about RF exposure, visit

the FCC website at www.fcc.gov

FCC Part 15 Class B Compliance

This device and its accessories comply with part 15 of FCC

rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device and its accessories may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device and its accessories must

accept any interference received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

Cautions for Battery

]Do not disassemble.

]Do not short-circuit.

]Do not expose to high temperature: 60°C (140°F).]

]Do not incinerate.

Battery Disposal

]Please dispose of your battery properly or bring to your

local wireless carrier for recycling.

]Do not dispose in fire or with hazardous or flammable

materials.

Adapter (Charger) Cautions

]Using the wrong battery charger could damage your phone

and void your warranty.

]The adapter or battery charger is intended for indoor use

only.

Do not expose the adapter or battery charger to direct sunlight

or use it in places with high humidity, such as the bathroom.

DoCoMo W-CDMA, GSM/GPRS system

Thank you for purchasing the “FOMA L602i”.

Before or during use of the FOMA L602i, make sure that you read this manual and the separate manuals such as for the battery pack

thoroughly so that you can use the FOMA L602i correctly. If you feel any inconvenience in reading the manual, contact the DoCoMo

Information Center listed on the back of this manual.

The FOMA L602i is designed to be your close partner. Treat it carefully at all times to ensure long-term performance.

Before using your FOMA phone

Because the FOMA phones use radio waves, they cannot be used in places where radio waves do not reach, such as inside tunnels,

underground, or in buildings; or the outside where radio waves are weak or out of the FOMA service area. They may not be used in the

high-rise buildings even when the antennas are unobstructed. You may also experience interruption of calls even when using without

moving while the radio waves are strong enough for the 3 antennas to appear on the display.

Use the FOMA phone carefully to avoid disturbing other people when in public, or in crowded or quiet places.

Since the FOMA phones use radio waves as the medium of telecommunication, calls may be tapped by the third party. However, the W-

CDMA and GSM/GPRS systems automatically support tapping prevention, so your conversation will be incomprehensible to the third party.

The FOMA phones change your voice into digital signals and send them to the other party. In places where the radio waves are weak, the

digital signals may not be converted correctly, and in such a case, the voice heard may sound differently from the original voice.

It is recommended that you make separate notes of the information stored in the FOMA phone and keep such notes in a safe place.

DoCoMo assumes no responsibility for the loss of data stored in the phone.

The user hereby agrees that the user shall be solely responsible for the result of the use of SSL. Neither DoCoMo nor the certifier listed

herein makes any representation and warranty as for the security in the use of SSL. In the event that the user shall sustain damage or loss

due to the use of SSL, neither DoCoMo nor the certifier assumes any responsibility for any such damage or loss.

Certifier: VeriSign Japan K.K. Betrusted Japan Co., Ltd. GeoTrust Japan, inc, RAS Security Inc., and SECOM Trust Systems Co., Ltd.

This FOMA phone can be used only via the FOMA network or Roaming service area of DoCoMo.

For those who use the FOMA phone for the first time

If this is the first time for you to use the FOMA phone, read this manual in the order as described below. Then you will get acquainted with the

outline of preparing and operating procedures for using your FOMA phone.

1. Attach and then charge the battery pack. >P39, P40

2. Turn the power to the FOMA phone ON, initialize, and confirm your phone number. >P44, P45

3. Confirm the buttons on the FOMA phone for their roles. >P28

4. Confirm the meanings of icons that appear on the display. >P31

5. Confirm how to operate the menus. >P35

6. Confirm how to make and receive calls. >P48, P58

You can download the latest version of this manual from DoCoMo Web page.

• “Manual (PDF file)” download

(http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/support/manual/download/index.html)

The instructions contained of this manual and URL may be changed without notice.

How to Read/Refer to This Manual

The search methods and page structure of this manual are described here. Screen displays and illustrations described in this

manual are for reference. The actual ones may differ.

How to Refer to This Manual

By the following search methods, you can find pages where your desired functions and explanations are described:

Tabs on Cover ]Cover

Search from the tabs printed on the cover.

]See the next page for more details.

Index ]P322

Search from keywords when you know the names of functions or services.

Contents ]P4

Search from the contents that categorize functions.

Features ]P6

Search from features when you want to use specific functions of FOMA L602i such as new functions or useful functions.

Menu List ]P234

Search from list for menus of FOMA L602i.

Quick Manual ]P332

Quick Manual gives you a clear, brief explanation about fundamental functions. You can take it with you when you go out.

Note that “FOMA L602i” is referred to as “FOMA phone” in this manual.

It is prohibited to copy all or part of this manual without permission.

The instructions contained in this manual may be changed without notice.

How to Read/Refer to This Manual

aSee “Overseas use” (P223) for how to use your FOMA phone outside Japan.

How to Read/Refer to This Manual

aFrom the Tabs on the Front Cover

Search for the functions and explanations in the order of the Front Cover >First page of Chapter >Description page.

aFrom the Index

Search from the index when you know the names of functions or services.

Contents / Precautions

Confirming before use

Making Calls /

Receiving Calls

Making /

ceiving videophone calls

Phonebook

Sound / Display

Settings

Safety settings

Multimedia

(Camera)

i-mode

Mail

i-appli

Data box

Adjusting the Ring Volume ....................76

Adjusting the Effect Tone Volume .........76

Setting a Ring Tone................................76

Setting an Effect Tone ...........................77

Setting a Vibrator ...................................78

Activating the Manner Mode .................78

Setting Ringing Operations for

Incoming Mail ........................................80

Setting Ringing Time..............................80

Setting Main Screen...............................80

Setting Sub Display................................82

Setting Fonts of Dial Characters ...........83

Setting Menu Style .................................83

Setting Backlight ....................................83

Setting color Scheme 83

Sound/

Display

1 Ring volume

2 Effect tone volume

3 Select ringtone

4 Select effect tone

5 Vibration settings

6 Manner settings

7 Mail ring duration

Select

Sound

On the Stand-by display, C[Menu] ]

(Sound) or “Sound”

To display the Sound menu

1 Main display

2 Sub display

3 Font

4 Menu style

5 Backlight

6 Color scheme

7 Lighting LED

Select

Display

On the Standby display, C[Menu] ]

(Display) or “Display”

To display the Display menu

.....91

calls

.....80

.....82

...115

...109

.....36

.....63

...141

.....68

6, 148

...153

Folder list (Melody) .................177

Folder list (Moving/i-motion) ...168

Mail list (Received)..................141

Mail list (Sent).........................146

Mail list (Unsent).....................148

Software list...........................161

Sound .........................................76

Effect tone volume ...................76

Mail ring ON/OFF .....................79

Manner mode ..........................78

Ring volume.............................76

Ringing time.............................80

Setting an Effect Tone..............77

Setting a ring tone....................76

How to Read/Refer to This Manual

How to use this manual

In this manual, operations of your FOMA phone are explained in the structure as shown below:

• Screen displays and illustrations described in this manual are for reference. The actual ones may differ.

Title

Shows the title

Description of operations

Provides the operation

number and operation

method. > P35

Supplementary

description of operation

Shortcut operation

Shows button operation

from the Stand-by display.

Description of functions

Provides detailed

explanation of each

function.

Supplementary

description of functions

Index tab

Shows the chapter title.

These titles are in the

tabs on the cover.

Screen

Shows the screen

displayed during/

after an operation.

Information

Gives necessary

information, notes,

and supplementary

explanation.

✽ The above page is a sample.

How to enter the menu

Contents/Precautions

Contents

Before using your FOMA phone....................... Rear side of Front Cover

For those who use the FOMA phone

for the first time ........................................... Rear Side of Front Cover

How to Read/Refer to This Manual...................................................... 1

Contents ............................................................................................. 4

Features of FOMA L602i...................................................................... 6

Making Full Use of FOMA L602i!.......................................................... 8

Safety Precautions (Always follow the safety precautions.)................. 10

Notes on Handling............................................................................. 20

Intellectual Property Rights ................................................................ 23

Accessories and Main Options .......................................................... 25

Confirming before use......................................... 27

• Phone Parts and Functions • Display • Menu Operations

• Soft Key Operations • Side Button Main Operations

• Using the UIM (FOMA Card) • Attaching/Removing the Battery Pack

• Charging the FOMA Phone • Turning Power ON

• Turning Power OFF • Date/Time

• Using Caller ID Notification Service • Own Number

Making calls/Receiving calls............................... 47

• Making calls • Receiving calls • Using Public mode (drive mode)

• Using Public mode (power off)

Making/Receiving Video-phone calls ................. 57

• About Video-phone • Making Video-phone Calls

• Receiving Video-phone Calls

• Changing Settings for Video-phone Calls

Phonebook........................................................... 63

• Adding to Phonebook • Searching for Phonebook Entries

• Checking the Number of Saved Phonebook Entries

• Setting Phonebook • Setting Groups • Displaying Own Number

Sound/Display ..................................................... 75

• Adjusting the Ring Volume • Adjusting the Effect Tone Volume

• Setting a Ring Tone • Setting an Effect Tone

• Setting a Vibrator • Activating the Manner Mode

• Setting Ringing Operations for Incoming Mail

• Setting Ringing Time • Setting Main Screen

• Setting Sub Display • Setting Fonts of Dial Characters

• Setting Menu Style • Setting Backlight

• Setting color Scheme • Setting LED

Settings ................................................................ 85

• Call/Answer • Call Feature • Video Phone • Date & Time

• Network (for overseas use) • Changing a Host from i-mode

• Security • • Others Settings

Safety settings ................................................... 103

• Passwords

• Preventing the Phone from Activating the Operation of Function

• Other Safety Settings

Multimedia (Camera) ......................................... 107

• Notes for when using the camera • Using the Camera

• Shooting Still Images • Shooting Moving Images

• Setting Camera

i-mode ................................................................ 119

• i-mode Menu • What is i-mode? • Displaying the iMenu display

• Displaying Sites from Bookmark • Displaying Screen memo

• Displaying Last URL • Displaying Internet Web Pages

• Displaying MessageR/F

• Checking Whether Center Holds MessageR/F

• Setting Functions of i-mode • Displaying Sites

• How to See/Use Sites • Using My Menu

• Changing i-mode Password

Contents/Precautions

Mail..................................................................... 137

• Mail Menu • i-mode Mail • Displaying Mail in Inbox

• Displaying Mail in Outbox • Displaying Mail in Unsent message

• Composing Mail • Checking New i-mode mail and Message

• Receiving Selected Mail • Checking whether Center Holds SMS

• Changing Mail Setting

i-appli ................................................................. 159

• What is i-appli • Downloading i-appli from Sites • Starting i-appli

Data box............................................................. 165

• Introduction of Data box • Displaying/Managing/Editing Images

• Playing back/Managing/Moving Images/i-motion

• Playing back/Managing/Melody

Tools................................................................... 179

• Using Alarm • Setting the Custom Menu

• Using the Infrared Communication Function • Using Calculator

• Using Unit Converter • Using World Time • Using Stop Watch

Stationery........................................................... 189

• Using Schedule • Using Memo

• Using Date Search • Using Date Counter

Network Service ................................................ 197

• Available Network Services • Using Voice Mail

• Using Call Waiting Service • Using Call Forwarding Service

• Using Nuisance Call Barring Service

• Using Caller ID Notification Service

• Using Caller ID Request Service • Using Set Arrival Act

• Selecting Arrival Call Act • Setting Remote Control

• International Roaming Service • Registering Additional Services

• Registering Additional Guidance • Using English Guidance

• Using Service Dialing Number • Using Call Barring

Data Transmission............................................. 209

• Data Transmission Available from the FOMA phone • Before Use

• Glossary of Data Transmission Terms

• Preparation Flow for Data Transmission • AT command

Entering Characters........................................... 215

• Entering Characters • List of Character Assignment of Dial Buttons

Overseas Use..................................................... 223

• International Roaming Service • Setting the Network Mode

• Confirming Before Using Overseas

• Using the FOMA Phone Overseas

Appendix............................................................ 233

• Menu list • Pre-installed data • Symbol/Special Character List

• Pictograph and Emoticon List • Common Phrase List

• Kuten Code List • List of city in World time

• Multiaccess Combination Patterns

• Multitask Combination Patterns

• Service Available with FOMA Phones • Introduction of Data Link

• Troubleshooting • Error Messages

• Introduction of Options and Related Equipment

• Warranty and Maintenance Services

• Specific Absorption Rate of the Mobile Phone

• Export/Re-export regulations of Japan and USA

Index/Quick Manual .......................................... 321

• Index • Quick Manual

Contents/Precautions

Features of FOMA L602i

FOMA is the name of the DoCoMo's service based on the W-CDMA format, authorized as one of the world’s

standards for third-generation mobile telecommunication systems (IMT-2000).

Main Futures

Video-phone >P58

You can have a conversation with the other party seeing

each other's face. You can also let the other party’s

voice heard from the speaker or the other party see the

landscape around you by rotating the camera.

i-mode Function

i-appli >P160

You can download and use a variety of i-appli software

programs from sites.

For example, you can download and enjoy a variety of

games.

Whole Range of Network Services

Voice Mail (Charged) >P198

Call Forwarding Service (Free) >P201

Call Waiting Service (Charged) >P200

SMS (Short Messages) (Free) >P152

Nuisance Call Barring Service (Free) >P202

Caller ID Display Request (Free) >P202

i-mode Function

Viewing sites >P130

This is on-line service to view the information via connecting

the site or homepage by simply operating the button.

i-mode mail

P149

You can compose and send i-mode mails. Also, you can

attach images, moving images and melodies to be sent.

i-motion >P135

You can obtain images and music from sites or Internet

web pages.

Chaku-motion/Chaku-Uta®>P76

You can download i-motion from i-mode site and set it as a

ring alert and/or reception image.

• “Chaku-Uta” is a registered trademark of Sony Music

Entertainment Inc.

i-motion Mail >P149, P150

You can attach moving images shot by the camera or i-

motion movies obtained from sites or Internet web pages to

i-mode mail to be sent.

Contents/Precautions

International Roaming >P224

You can make/receive voice/video-phone calls, perform

i-mode communication, exchange i-mode mail and SMS

messages and perform data transmission with a

personal computer connected to your FOMA phone

overseas with the same phone number. Moreover,

subscribers of the Voice Mail or Call Forwarding Service

can use the network services.

Useful Functions for Overseas Use

Unit converter >P185

You can convert a value of currency, surface, length,

weight, temperature, capacity or velocity from one unit

to another. You can use Unit converter in confirming a

price converted into yen when you shop overseas.

World time

P187

You can check the date and time of 58 cities in the

world. Also, a world map is displayed so that you can

confirm the locations of cities and the national flags. You

can use Global Clock in confirming the date and time

and the location of your next destination on a trip.

Dual clock display

P81

You can display the time of two cities on the Stand-by

display at the same time. For example, you can view the

time difference by setting the city of a stay place.

Using the Infrared Communication

P182

You can exchange the data with FOMA handset via

Infrared.

To display a character in phonebook

P64

In a phonebook, you can set the image and the character

for each entry. You can make your own character by

changing “Face”, “Hair”, “Tops”, “Bottoms”, “Accessory”

and “Scenery”.

Camera Functions >P109, P115

You can shoot still images and moving images using the

rotatable camera (1,300,000 effective pixels and 1,300,000

recording pixels). You can shoot not only a person or

landscape but also yourself by rotating the camera.

You can use various functions such as adjusting images,

zooming images, special effects when you shoot images.

Contents/Precautions

Making Full Use of FOMA L602i!

"Video-phone", communication seein

each other's face.

Contents/Precautions

Sim

le and Eas

Camera Function

Contents/Precautions

Safety Precautions

(Always follow the safety precautions.)

aBefore using the FOMA phone, read these

safety precautions carefully so that you can use

it correctly. After reading the precautions, keep

them in a safe place for future reference.

aBe sure to observe these safety precautions

because they are designed to protect you or

persons around you from causing injury and to

avoid damages to the property.

aThe symbols below indicate the levels of danger

or damage that can be caused if the particular

precautions are not observed.

aThe following symbols show specific directions:

a“Safety Precautions” are divided into the

following 6 sections:

General precautions for FOMA phone, batteries,

adapters/chargers and UIM ................................ P11

Precautions for FOMA phone ............................. P13

Precautions for batteries ..................................... P15

Precautions for adapters/chargers ...................... P17

Precautions for UIM ............................................ P18

Notes on using near electronic

medical equipment.............................................. P19

This symbol indicates that incorrect

handling will almost certainly cause

death or serious injury.

This symbol indicates that incorrect

handling poses a risk of causing

death or serious injury.

This symbol indicates that incorrect

handling poses a risk of causing

injury or damage to the product or

property.

Danger

Warning

Caution

Denotes things not to do (Prohibition).

Don’t

Denotes not to disassemble.

Denotes not to touch with wet hands.

Denotes not to use where it could get wet.

Do not

disassemble

No wet

hands

Avoid

water

Denotes mandatory instructions (matters that

must be complied with).

Denotes to pull the power from the outlet.

Pull the power

plug out

Contents/Precautions

General precautions for FOMA

phone, batteries, adapters/chargers,

and UIM

Danger

Use only the batteries and adapters /

chargers approved by DoCoMo for the

FOMA phone.

If you use any type of battery, adapter or charger

other than the specified one, the FOMA phone,

battery or other devices may leak, overheat, burst,

catch fire, or get damaged.

Battery Pack L02 FOMA AC Adapter 01

FOMA AC Adapter 01 for both overseas and

domestic usage FOMA DC Adapter 01

• For other specified products, contact a handling

counter such as a DoCoMo shop.

Do not disassemble, modify or solder the

FOMA phone or accessories.

Accidents such as fire, injury, electric shock, or

malfunction may result. The battery fluid may leak,

overheat, bust or catch fire.

Do not use or leave the FOMA phone or

accessories in places where it is exposed

to direct sunlight, or in extremely high

temperatures such as inside a car in the

summer heat.

Otherwise, the devices may deform or malfunction,

battery fluid may leak, overheat, burst, or catch fire, or

performance and longevity may deteriorate. Also, part

of the case may be heated, causing bare skin burns.

Do not let the FOMA phone or accessories

get wet.

If liquids such as water or pet urine get onto them,

overheating, electric shock, fire, malfunction, injuries

or others may result. Pay attention to the place of use

of the way of handling.

Warning

Do not use the FOMA phone near places

such as gas stations where there is danger

of fire or explosion.

If used in dusty places or where there are flammable

gases such as propane or gasoline, explosions or fire

may result.

Don’t

Avoid

water

Don’t

Do not

disassemble

Contents/Precautions

Warning

Do not place the batteries, the FOMA

phone, adapters/chargers, or UIM in

microwave ovens or high-pressure

containers.

The battery may leak, overheat, burst, or catch fire.

The FOMA phone or the adapter/charger may

overheat, smoke, or catch fire, or its circuit parts may

burst.

Do not throw the FOMA phone or

accessories, or subject them to severe

shocks.

The battery may leak, overheat, burst, catch fire, or

cause damage to the equipment.

Be careful not to let electroconductive

materials (metal pieces, pencil leads, etc.)

contact with the charging terminal or

connector terminals. Also, make sure not

to let them inside the FOMA phone.

Short-circuit could cause catching fire or malfunction

of the FOMA phone.

If the FOMA phone or accessories begins

to emit an odor, overheat, discolor, deform,

etc., while being used, charged, or stored,

take the countermeasures as follows;

1. Pull the power plug off the outlet or socket.

2. Turn off the FOMA phone.

3. Remove the battery pack from the FOMA phone.

If you use the devices with these symptoms not

handled, they may overheat, burst, or catch fire, or

the battery fluid may leak.

Caution

If children use the FOMA phone or

accessories, a guardian should explain the

safety precautions and correct operations to

them. The guardian should also make sure

that the instructions are followed during use.

Otherwise, injury may result.

Do not place the FOMA phone or

accessories on unstable locations such as

wobbly tables or slanted locations.

The FOMA phone or accessories may fall, resulting in

injury or malfunction.

Keep out of the reach of babies and

infants.

Accidental swallowing or injury may result.

Do not store in humid or dusty places, or in

high temperature environments.

Malfunction may result.

Don’t

Contents/Precautions

Caution

Temperature of the FOMA phone, battery

pack or adapter/charger may rise while

charging the battery, shooting moving

images, playing back or using the video

phone, i-mode or i-appli repeatedly or

continuously for a long time.

Prolonged direct contact with a high temperature

part may cause redness, itching, rash, etc. on skin

depending on your physical conditions or

predisposition.

Be careful especially when using the FOMA phone

connected to the adapter / charger continuously for a

long time.

Precautions for FOMA phone

Warning

Turn off the FOMA phone in places where

use is prohibited as in airplanes or

hospitals.

Otherwise, electronic devices and electronic medical

appliances may be adversely affected. If the Auto

Power ON function is set, deactivate the setting, then

turn the power off.

For use inside medical facilities, make sure that you

comply with their regulations.

You may be punished for using the FOMA

phone in airplanes, which is prohibited by law.

Turn off the FOMA phone near high-

precision electronic devices or devices

using weak electronic signals.

The FOMA phone may possibly cause these devices

to malfunction.

Electronic devices that may be affected:

Hearing aids, implanted cardiac pacemakers,

implanted defibrillators, other medical electronic

devices, fire alarms, automatic doors and other

automatically controlled devices.

If you are using an implanted cardiac pacemaker,

implanted defibrillator or any other electronic

medical device, consult the manufacturer or

retailer of the device for advice regarding possible

effects from the radio waves.

If you have any implanted electronic

medical equipment, do not place your

FOMA phone in a chest pocket or inner

pocket.

If the FOMA phone is close to electronic medical

equipment, it may cause that equipment to

malfunction.

Don’t

Contents/Precautions

Warning

For those with weak heart conditions, the

vibrator and ring volume must be adjusted

carefully.

Those functions may cause an effect on the heart.

Do not operate the FOMA phone while

driving a vehicle.

Operating a mobile phone while driving has been

prohibited since November 1, 2004. During driving,

activate Public mode or Voice Mail.

Do not directly point the infrared data port

at someone’s eyes during transmission.

His/Her eyes may possibly be affected. Other

infrared devices may operate erroneously if the

infrared data port is pointed at them during

transmission.

When talking on the speaker phone, be

sure to keep the FOMA phone away from

your ear.

Otherwise, your hearing could be impaired.

Do not put the FOMA phone in the place

where it could be affected by an expanded

airbag, etc., on the dashboard.

If the airbag expands, the FOMA phone could hit you

and others, causing accidents such as injury and the

FOMA phone could become damaged.

If thunder starts to rumble while you are

using the FOMA phone outdoors, turn the

power off, and move to a safe place.

Otherwise, you could be struck by lightning or suffer

an electric shock.

Caution

Do not swing the FOMA phone by its strap.

The FOMA phone may hit you or persons around you,

and accident such as injury or malfunction may result.

Itching, rash or eczema may be caused

depending on your physical conditions or

predisposition. If an abnormality occurs,

stop using the FOMA phone immediately,

and seek medical attention.

Metals are used for the following parts:

Don’t

Contents/Precautions

Caution

Do not allow liquids such as water, or

foreign materials such as metal pieces or

flammable materials to get into the UIM

insertion slit of the FOMA phone.

Fire, electric shock or malfunction may result.

Electronic devices in some types of cars

can be affected by use of the FOMA phone.

For safety’s sake, do not use the FOMA phone inside

such cars.

Do not place magnetic cards or similar

objects near the FOMA phone or between

phone parts.

Information on magnetic cards such as cash cards,

credit cards, telephone cards and floppy disks may

be deleted.

Be careful not to let your finger or the strap

get caught when you open and close the

FOMA phone.

Accidents such as injury or malfunction may result.

Precautions for batteries

aCheck the description on the label of the

battery pack for the type of battery.

Danger

If the battery fluid gets into your eyes, do not

rub them. Flush your eyes with clean water

and get medical attention immediately.

Otherwise, the loss of eyesight may result.

Do not throw the battery into fire.

The battery may leak, overheat, burst or catch fire.

Do not let any metal such as a wire contact

the terminal. Also, do not carry or store the

battery together with a metal necklace.

The battery may leak, overheat, burst or catch fire.

Don’t

Description Type

Li-ion Lithium-ion battery

(Li-polymer) (Lithium-polymer battery)

Portion Material Finishing

Earpiece/Speaker

Sub display frame

Surrounding part

of Navigation

button, Menu/

Select button

Aluminium

Stainless

ABS

Oxidation

treatment

Chromium plating

finishing over

nickel plating

Contents/Precautions

Danger

Do not pierce the battery pack with nails,

hit it with a hammer, or step on it.

The battery may leak, overheat, burst or catch fire.

Do not use excessive force to attach the

battery to the FOMA phone when you

cannot attach it successfully. Also, check

that the battery is the right way round

when you attach it.

The battery may leak, overheat, burst or catch fire.

Warning

If the battery fluid comes in contact with

skin or clothes, immediately stop using the

battery and wash affected areas

thoroughly with clean water.

The battery fluid is harmful to skin.

If charging is not completed at the end of

the specified charging time, stop charging.

Otherwise, the battery may leak, overheat, burst or

catch fire.

If the battery fluid leaks or emits an odor,

immediately stop using the battery and

keep it away from fire.

The battery fluid, being flammable, may catch fire and

cause an explosion.

Caution

An exhausted battery should not be

disposed of with ordinary waste.

The battery may catch fire or destroy the environment.

After insulating the battery terminals with tape, bring

them to a handling counter such as a DoCoMo shop

or dispose of them in accordance with local waste

disposal regulations.

Don’t

Contents/Precautions

Precautions for adapters/chargers

Warning

Never short-circuit the charging terminals

when the adapter is plugged into the

power outlet or cigarette lighter socket.

Also, never touch the charging terminals

with fingers or other bare skin.

Fire, malfunction, electric shock or injury may result.

Do not touch the power cord of the

adapter/charger, or power outlet with wet

hands.

Electric shock or injury may result.

Do not use the AC adapter in moist places

such as a bathroom.

Electric shock may occur.

When the adapter/charger is not to be

used for a long period of time, unplug the

power cord from the outlet.

Otherwise, electric shock, fire, or malfunction may

result.

Do not use a damaged adapter/charger

cord or power cord.

Electric shock, overheating or fire may result.

If liquids such as water get in the charger,

unplug the power cord immediately from

the outlet or cigarette lighter socket.

Liquid inside the charger may cause electric shock,

smoke, or fire.

When plugging the AC adapter into the

power outlet, firmly plug it in, taking care

not to contact with metal straps or the like.

Electric shock, short-circuit or fire may result.

Use the adapter/charger at the specified

VAC.

Fire or malfunction may result. When using the

FOMA phones overseas, use FOMA AC Adapter 01

for both overseas and domestic usage.

AC adapter: 100 VAC

FOMA AC Adapter for both overseas and domestic

usage: 100 to 240 VAC

(Connect only to home AC outlet)

DC adapter: 12/24 VDC

(For negative (-) grounded vehicles only)

If a fuse of the DC adapter has blown,

replace it with a specified fuse.

Otherwise, catching fire or malfunction may result.

For the specified fuse, see the user’s manual.

Pull the power

plug out

Don’t

Pull the power

plug out

Don’t

No wet

hands

Don’t

Contents/Precautions

Warning

The DC adapter is for use only in a negative

(-) grounded vehicle. Do not use them in a

positive (+) grounded vehicle.

Fire may result.

Wipe the dust off the power plugs.

Fire may result.

Place the charger on a stable location

during charging. Do not cover or wrap the

charger in cloth or bedding.

The FOMA phone may become separated, or the

charger may overheat, leading to fire or malfunction.

If it starts to thunder, do not touch the

FOMA phone and adapter/charger.

You may be struck by lighting or suffer an electric

shock.

Caution

Before cleaning, pull the plug from the

power outlet or cigarette lighter socket.

Electric shock may result.

Always hold the plug when pulling the

adapter/charger out of the power outlet or

cigarette lighter socket.

If you pull the plug out by the cord, the cord may be

damaged, which could result in electric shock or fire.

Do not place heavy objects on the

adapter/charger cord and power cord.

Electric shock or fire may result.

Precautions for UIM

Caution

Be careful when removing the UIM (IC

portion).

Your hand or finger may be injured.

Don’t

Pull the power

plug out

Don’t

Contents/Precautions

Notes on using near electronic medical

equipment

aThe description below meets “Guidelines on the

Use of Radio-communication Equipment such as

Cellular Telephones – Safeguards for Electronic

Medical Equipment” by the Electromagnetic

Compatibility Conference Japan.

Warning

Turn off the phone in crowded areas such as

inside trains during rush hour, as someone

with an implanted cardiac pacemaker or

implanted defibrillator may be near you.

Operation of an implanted cardiac pacemaker or

implanted defibrillator can be affected by radio waves.

Comply with the following in hospitals or

health care facilities:

• Do not carry the FOMA phone into operating

rooms, intensive care units (ICU) or coronary care

units (CCU).

• Turn off the FOMA phone in hospital wards.

• If there is any electronic medical equipment near

you, turn off the FOMA phone even when in a

location such as a lobby.

• Comply with any regulations of hospital and health

care facilities instructing you not to use or carry in a

mobile phone.

• If the Auto Power On function is set, deactivate the

setting, then turn the power off.

If you use an implanted cardiac pacemaker

or implanted defibrillator, use the mobile

phone 22cm or more away from an

implanted cardiac pacemaker or implanted

defibrillator.

Operation of an implanted cardiac pacemaker or

implanted defibrillator may be affected by radio

waves.

Patients using electronic medical equipment

other than implanted cardiac pacemakers

or implanted defibrillators (outside medical

establishments for treatment at home, etc.)

should check the influence of radio waves

upon the equipment by consulting its

manufacturer.

Operation of electronic medical equipment may be

affected by radio waves.

Contents/Precautions

Notes on Handling

General Notes

aDo not let the equipment get wet.

The FOMA phone, battery and adapter/charger or UIM

(FOMA card) are not waterproofed. Do not use them in which

are high in humidity such as in bathrooms, and do not allow

them to get wet from rain. Furthermore, if carrying them with

your body, the internal parts may become corroded if

exposed to body perspiration.

If the parts are found to have been damaged due to

exposure to the liquids, any repairs will not be covered by

warranty, or repairs may not be possible.

This may be repaired at your cost even if repairs are

possible.

aUse a dry soft cloth (lens cleaning cloth) to

clean the equipment.

• The screen of the FOMA phone sometimes has a

special coating so that it is easier to see. If you rub it

roughly with a dry cloth, it may be scratched. Take care

of the way of handling, and use only a dry, soft cloth

such as used for cleaning glasses.

When the FOMA phone is left with water drops or stains

on the display, smear may be generated or its coating

may be peeled off.

• Do not use alcohol, thinner, benzene, detergent or other

solvents for cleaning, otherwise the printing may be

removed or discoloration may result.

aOccasionally clean the connector terminals of

the equipment using a dry cotton swab.

If the connector terminal becomes soiled, the connection

may deteriorate so that the power goes off or the battery

does not charge fully. Wipe the connector terminal with a

dry cloth or cotton swab.

aDo not place the FOMA phone near an air

conditioner outlet.

Condensation may form due to rapid changes in

temperature, and this may corrode internal parts and

cause malfunction.

aDo not place the FOMA phone in places where

it may be subjected to excessive force.

Do not place the FOMA phone in a bag along with many

other articles or in a trouser pocket, because this can

damage the LCD display and internal circuitry.

Malfunctions caused by such damage are not covered by

the warranty.

aDo carefully read each instruction manual

attached to the battery pack or

adapter/charger.

Notes on handling the FOMA phone

aAvoid using in extremely high or low

temperatures.

The FOMA phone should be used within a temperature

range from 5 °C to 35°C and a humidity from 45% to

85%.

Contents/Precautions

aThe FOMA phone, if operated near ordinary

phones, televisions or radios that are in use,

may affect them. You should operate your

FOMA phone as far away from such equipment

as possible.

aIt is recommended that you make separate

notes of the information stored in the FOMA

phone and keep such notes in a safe place.

DoCoMo assumes no responsibility for any loss of the

stored data items.

aDo not sit with the FOMA phone in your

trousers or skirts pocket. Do not place the

FOMA phone under heavy objects in a bag.

Malfunction may result.

aMake sure that nothing, such as a strap, gets

caught between the parts of the FOMA phone

when you close it.

Malfunction or breakage may result.

aThe FOMA phone becomes warm while using

or charging, but this is not an abnormality. Use

the FOMA phone as it is.

aDo not leave the FOMA phone with a camera

pointing direct to the sunlight.

Pixels may be discolored or burns may result.

Notes on handling batteries

aBatteries have a limited life.

If the usable time of your FOMA phone is extremely short

even if the battery is fully charged, replace the battery.

Make sure that you only buy the specified battery.

aCharge the battery in a place with an ambient

temperature from 5°C to 35°C.

aMake sure that the battery is charged when

you use the FOMA phone for the first time.

aWhen the FOMA phone has been left unused

for a long period of time, charge the battery

pack before using, or the battery may be easily

exhausted.

aThe usable time of the battery varies depending

on the usage environment or its remaining life.

aThough the battery pack may swell a little as it

comes closer to the end of its service life under

some conditions, it is not a problem.

aStore the batteries in a well ventilated place out

of direct sunlight.

When the battery is not to be used for a long period of

time, unplug the power cord from the FOMA phone or

adapter (including charger) with the battery power

completely drained, and store it in the plastic bag

wrapping the battery pack.

Contents/Precautions

Notes on handling chargers and adapters

aCharge the battery in a place with an ambient

temperature from 5°C to 35°C.

aCharge the battery where:

• There is excessive humidity, vibration, and dust.

• There are no ordinary phones, television sets or radios

nearby.

aDuring charging, the adapter or charger may

become warm. This is not an abnormality, so

continue charging.

aDo not use the DC Adapter for charging the

battery when the car engine is not running.

The car battery could go flat.

aWhen using the power outlet having the

disengaging prevention mechanism, observe

the instructions given in that instruction manual.

aDo not give a strong shock. Also, do not

deform the charging terminal.

Malfunction may result.

Notes on handling the UIM

aDo not apply more than necessary force when

detaching the UIM.

aDo not apply more than necessary force when

inserting it into the phone.

aThe UIM may become warm during use, but

this is not a sign of a malfunction. Continue

using it as it is.

aThe warranty does not cover damage caused

by inserting the UIM into some other of IC card

reader/writer.

aAlways keep the IC portion clean.

aUse a dry soft cloth to clean the equipment.

aIt is recommended that you make separate

notes of the information stored on the UIM and

keep such notes in a safe place.

DoCoMo assumes no responsibility for any loss of the

stored data items.

aFor the environmental protection, bring any

unneeded UIMs to a handling counter such as

a DoCoMo shop.

aAvoid using in extremely high or low

temperatures.

aDo not damage, carelessly touch, or short-

circuit the IC.

Data may be lost or damage to the IC may result.

aDo not drop the UIM or subject it to strong

impacts.

Malfunction may result.

aDo not bend the UIM or place heavy objects on

it.

Malfunction may result.

Contents/Precautions

Notes on handling the Camera

You may be imposed punishment according to the

law and rule (such as nuisance prevention ordinance)

if you use the FOMA phone to give a remarkable

nuisance and misdeed to the public.

Intellectual Property Rights

Copyrights and Rights of Portrait

You have no right to copy, modify, or distribute the contents

of which a third party holds the copyright such as text,

images, music, or software downloaded from web pages on

the Internet, or images shot by the cameras of this product

without permission from the copyright holder except for when

the copy or quote is for personal use that is allowed by the

Note that it may be prohibited to shoot or record live

performances or exhibitions even for personal use. Make sure

that you refrain from taking portraits of other persons and

distributing such portraits over the Internet without consent,

as this violates portrait rights.

Trademarks

• “FOMA”, “mova”, “i-mode”, “i-appli”, “i-motion”, “i-motion

Mail”, “MessageF”, “i-melody”, “mopera”, “mopera U”,

“WORLD CALL”, “WORLD WING”, “Deco-mail” “Public

mode”, “My DoCoMo” and the logos of “FOMA”, “i-mode”,

and “i-appli” are trademarks or registered trademarks of

NTT DoCoMo, Inc.

• The “Free Dial Service” name and its logo are trademarks of

NTT Communications.

• “Multitask” is a trademark of the NEC Corporation.

• “Catch phone” (Call Waiting Service) is a registered

trademark of Nippon Telegraph and Telephone

Corporation.

• Java and Java related trademarks and logos are

trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems,

Inc. in the United States and other countries.

• “Chaku-Uta” is a registered trademark of Sony Music

Entertainment Inc.

• NetFront and are trademarks or

registered trademarks of ACCESS Co.,Ltd. In Japan and

other countries.

• Microsoft, MS, and Windows are registered trademarks or

trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States

and other countries.

• Windows XP is abbreviation of Microsoft

Windows

Professional operating system or Microsoft

Windows

Home Edition operating system.

• Windows 2000 is Microsoft

Windows

2000 Professional

operating system.

Please respect the privacy of individuals around you when

taking and sending photos using camera-equipped mobile

phones.

Contents/Precautions

• Sometimes transcribed like Windows XP or 2000.

• Other company names and product names described in

the text are trademarks or registered trademarks of those

companies.

Others

• This product contains NetFront for FOMA Internet browser

software of ACCESS Co., Ltd.

NetFront is registered trademarks of ACCESS Co., Ltd. in

Japan other countries.

(With Instruction Manual)

• Some part of the software in this product contains modules

developed by Independent JPEG Group.

• Adobe and Acrobat Reader are trademarks or registered

trademarks of Adobe systems Incorporated in the US and

other countries.

• This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 patent portfolio

license for the personal and non-commercial use of a

consumer to

– encode video in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual

Standard (“MPEG-4 Video”) and/or

– decode MPEG-4 Video that was encoded by a consumer

engaged in a personal and non-commercial activity

and/or was obtained from a licensed video provider. No

license is granted or implied for any other use.

Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA,

LLC.

• Licensed by QUALCOMM Incorporated under one or more

of the following United States Patents and/or their

counterparts in other nations:

4,901,307 5,490,165 5,056,109 5,504,773 5,101,501

5,506,865 5,109,390 5,511,073 5,228,054 5,535,239

5,267,261 5,544,196 5,267,262 5,568,483 5,337,338

5,600,754 5,414,796 5,657,420 5,416,797 5,659,569

5,710,784 5,778,338

Contents/Precautions

Accessories and Main Options

• Instruction manual

•Quick Manual

included (P332)

• L602i Handset

(including Warranty

and Rear Cover L02)

• CD-ROM for L602i

(“Manual for Data

Communication” (PDF

file) is included.)

• FOMA AC Adapter 01

(With Warranty card and Instruction Manual)

• FOMA AC Adapter for Abroad 01

(With Warranty card and Instruction Manual)

Other Options >P308

• Battery Pack L02

(With Instruction

Manual)

Confirming before use

Phone Parts and Functions .................. 28

Display ................................................... 31

Menu Operations................................... 35

Soft Key Operations.............................. 35

Side Button Main Operations ............... 36

Using the UIM (FOMA Card) ................. 37

Attaching/Removing the

Battery Pack .......................................... 39

Charging the FOMA Phone................... 40

Turning Power ON................................. 44

Turning Power OFF ............................... 44

Date/Time .............................................. 45

Using Caller ID Notification Service ..... 45

Own Number.......................................... 45

Confirming before use

Ç)égópëOÇÃämîF

Confirming before use

Phone Parts and Functions

The Name and function of each part of the FOMA phone are as follows.

• This manual describes operation of each button using an illustration of the button.

Dimensions (H x W x D):

Approx. 94 x 50 x 18 mm

The height and thickness are

the values of folded FOMA

phone.

Weight:

Approx. 93g

With battery attached

• Antenna is embedded in the handset.

Confirming before use

1Earpiece/Speaker

While talking over a call (using a speaker phone), the

other party’s voice is heard from here.

While not talking, ring alerts and alarms are emitted

from here.

: Do not put your ears close to the speaker phone being

active, because it may emit loud sound.

2Main display >P31

3Camera

For shooting still images and moving images, and for

sending images on a video-phone call. Rotate the

camera to take a shot.

>P58, P109, P115

4Earphone/Microphone terminal

For connecting a Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone Set

with Switch (option), etc. Do not forcibly pull the

earphone/microphone cover .

: You can rotate it forward or backward when it is open.

5MMail button

Press from the Stand-by display to bring up the Mail

menu. >P138

Press from the Stand-by display for 2 or more

seconds to check new message. >P127, P154

6KNavigation button

For selecting an item and scrolling the display.

The following operations can be performed from the

Stand-by display:

UUp button : The phonebook list screen appears.

>P67

DDown button : The custom menu screen appears.

>P182

LLeft button : Received call screen appears.

>P86

Press for 1 or more seconds to

display the received mail list. >P88

RRight button : Redialed call screen appears.

>P87

Press for 1 or more seconds to

display the sent mail list. >P88

7TVideo-phone button

Press to make/receive video-phone calls. >P58, P60

Press on the Stand-by display to view the other party that

you made the latest call.

Press to switch modes, etc. in entering mode

(Pictograph/Symbol/Emoticon). >P217

Press to rotate the image when you start the camera.

8CMenu/Select button

Press on the Stand-by display to bring up the Main

menu.

P35

An operation displayed in the soft key area can be

performed.

P35

Confirming before use

Ç)égópëOÇÃämîF

Confirming before use

9AStart button

Press to make/receive voice calls. >P48, P50

Press on the Stand-by display to view the other party

that you made the latest call. Press for 1 or more

seconds to display all received/sent mail history.

Press while characters are entered to switch between

full-pitch and half-pitch. >P216

!Dial button

"*(asterisk) button

Press to enter “ ” and to switch between upper case

and lower case while characters are entered. >P218

On the stand-by display, press this key for 1 or more

seconds to set or cancel Public mode (drive mode).

>P51

#Microphone

For speaking to the other party.

For recording sound when shooting moving images by

the camera.

$Ii-mode button

Press from the Stand-by display to bring up the i-

mode menu. >P120

Press for 2 or more seconds from the Stand-by

display to bring up software list screen of i-appli.

>P161

Press from the entering character mode to switch the

mode (Hiragana/Katakana/English/ Number)

An operation displayed in the soft key area can be

performed. >P35

%NMultitask button

Press to bring up the Task Manager.

Press for 1 or more seconds to bring up the New Task

screen.

>P280

&QClear button

Press to return to the previous operation.

Press to cancel the operation depending on the function

such as sending mails or downloading data.

Also, press to delete entered text.

Note that the operation may not be canceled

depending on the timing of canceling.

(PPower/End button

Press for 1 or more seconds to turn the power on.

Press for 1 or more seconds to turn the power off.

>P44

Press to end calls and end functions.

)#(Sharp)/ Manner Mode button

Press for 1 or more seconds from the Stand-by

display to activate/deactivate the Manner Mode.

>P78

Also, press to enter “#” and to start a new line while

characters are entered.

~Connector terminal

For connecting adapters and cables.

+Sub display >P33

,LED

You can set LED to go ON when making/receiving a

call, playing music or doing other operations. >P84

Confirming before use

-Strap hole

.Rear cover

/Infrared data port

Point this port to the other device for infrared

communication. >P182

:FEVolume buttons

1. For adjusting the keypad volume in idle mode >

P36

2. For adjusting the volume during a call >P36

;GCamera button

Press from the Stand-by display to start up a camera.

>P109

Display

Main Display

1~ : Shows the level of the received radio waves.

Strong Weak

: Out of the service area.

2: Displayed during a voice call.

: Displayed during a video-phone call.

: Displayed during a voice call using the speaker phone.

3(Blinks): while i-mode is activated.

(Blinks): during i-mode communication.

: Displayed during trying dialup connection.

: Displayed during dialup connection.

: Displayed while an SSL-enabled page is displayed or

obtained.

4: Displayed while “All Call Rejection” is activated.

5: Displayed while a function (Task) is activated.

: Performing multiple functions (Task).

(Blinking): Alarm starts while talking, activating camera

or setting public mode (drive mode).

6(White): Displayed when the i-mode Center holds a mail.

(Pink): Displayed when the box for i-mode mail at the

i-mode Center is full.

(White): Displayed when the i-mode Center holds a

MessageR.

1 23456 789!" #

$%&()

Confirming before use

Ç)égópëOÇÃämîF

Confirming before use

(Pink): Displayed when the box for MessageR at the

i-mode Center is full.

(White): Displayed when the i-mode center holds a

MessageF.

(Pink): Displayed when the box for MessageF at the

i-mode Center is full.

(White): Displayed when the i-mode Center holds mail,

a messageR and a messageF.

(Pink): Displayed when the boxes for i-mode mail,

MessageR and MessageF at the i-mode Center are full.

7(White): Displayed when an unread mail exists.

(White): Displayed when an unread SMS message exists.

(White): Displayed when an unread mail and SMS

message exist.

(Pink): Displayed when the inbox is full.

: Displayed when the area for SMS messages in the

UIM is full.

8(Yellowish green): Displayed when a Voice Mail

message exists.

(Orange): Displayed when the box for Voice Mail

messages is full.

9(White): Displayed when an unread MessageR exists.

(Pink): Displayed when the box for MessageR is full.

!: Displayed when an unread MessageF exists.

(Pink): Displayed when the box for MessageF is full.

": Displayed when i-appli is being started.

: Displayed when i-appli auto start failed.

#~ : Shows the battery level.

$(Pink): Displayed during Manner mode.

(Blue): Displayed during Original manner mode.

%: Displayed when the ringtone for incoming voice

call or video-phone call sounds, not operating a

vibration.

: Displayed when the vibration for incoming call is

activated to “Pattern 1” or “Pattern 2” when the

alarm for incoming voice call or video-call is muted,

and the vibration operate linked with a melody.

: Displayed when a vibration and a ringtone for

incoming voice call and video-phone call sounds

at the same time and the vibration is set to

operate linked with a melody.

: Displayed when a vibration and a ringtone from

incoming voice call or video-phone call do not

operate.

&: Public mode (Drive mode) active.

(: Displayed while an alarm is set.

: Displayed when today’s schedule exists.

: Displayed when an alarm is set and today’s

Confirming before use

schedule exists.

):Displayed when UIM is not inserted or an error

occurs on the UIM.

Sub Display

: Shows the level of the received radio waves.

Strong Weak

: Out of the service area.

2: Displayed during a voice call.

: Displayed during a video-phone call.

: Displayed during a voice call using the speaker

phone.

: Displayed during trying dialup connection.

: Displayed during dialup connection.

3: Displayed while “All Call Rejection” is activated.

4(White): Displayed when the i-mode Center holds a

mail, MessageR/F, an unread mail, SMS,

MessageR/F, or the message in answering machine

exists.

(Pink): Displayed when the box for mail, MessageR/F

at the i-mode Center Mail, SMS, MessageR/F, or the

message in answering machine is full in inbox or UIM.

5: Displayed when an alarm is set, and blinks when

an alarm starts while public mode (drive mode) is

set.

: Displayed when today’s schedule exists.

: Displayed when an alarm is set and today’s

schedule exists.

6~ : Show the battery level.

7(Pink): Manner mode active.

(Blue): Original manner mode active.

: In this mode, a ring alert sounds and an incoming

vibrator does not operate for voice and video-

phone calls.

: In this mode, an incoming vibrator operates in

“Pattern 1 (Vibration only)” or “Pattern 2 (Vibration

only)” or no ring alert sounds and an incoming

vibrator operates in “Melody + vibration” for

incoming voice/video-phone calls.

123456

789

Confirming before use

Ç)égópëOÇÃämîF

Confirming before use

: In this mode, a ring alert sounds and an incoming

vibrator operates in “Melody + vibration” for

incoming voice/video-phone calls.

: In this mode no ring alert sounds and no incoming

vibrator operates for incoming voice/video-phone

calls.

: Public mode (Drive mode) active.

Subdisplay

The various information such as clock or icons is

displayed as follows.

Missed call/ New received E-mail

When closing the FOMA phone, following messages are

displayed on the Sub display.

• When you open the FOMA phone on displaying “X

Missed call”, you can view the time or phone number in

main display. You can view the call history by pressing

C. If you press I[Close], “X Missed call” will not be

displayed anymore.

• When you open the FOMA phone on displaying “X

Message”, the pop up message on the Sub display will

disappear after confirming the screen.

1 Message

1 Missed call

DoCoMo Taro

Menu Operations

Example: How to set the “Stand-by display” of the “Main

display”.

aSelecting a function using K

1. On the Stand-by display, C[Menu] ]Enlarge

using K]C]Highlight “Main display” using

H]Move the cursor to “Stand-by display” using

H]C

aSelecting a function by pressing the key

corresponding to the menu number

1. On the Stand-by display, C[Menu] ]Enlarge

using K]C]1]1

Soft Key Operations

To perform an operation displayed in the soft key area on

the Main display, press the corresponding button as

below.

Information

• (Navigation icon) that indicates the directions in which you

can scroll and select items using Kis also displayed in the

soft key area.

• Items displayed in the soft key area vary depending on the

display.

KC 1 1

1 Main display

Display

Select

1 Stand-by display

2 Incoming call

3 Outgoing call

Select

Main display

Select

Display

2 Sub display

3 Font

4 Menu style

5 Backlight

6 Color scheme

7 Lighting LED

KC HC HC

1 Main display

Display

Select

1 Stand-by display

2 Incoming call

3 Outgoing call

Select

Main display

Select

Display

2 Sub display

3 Font

4 Menu style

5 Backlight

6 Color scheme

7 Lighting LED

Confirming before use

Soft key area

Confirming before use

Ç)égópëOÇÃämîF

Confirming before use

Side Button Main Operations

aMajor operations that can be performed by pressing

FE/Gwith the FOMA phone closed

aMain operations that can be performed by pressing

FE/Gwith the FOMA phone opened

Play back/pause moving

images/a melody

Start the camera

Adjust the volume when playing

back a moving image/melody

While playing a moving

image/melody ]FE

When moving images/a melody is

paused ]G(Play back)

While moving images/a melody is

played back ]G(Pause)

In Stand-by ]Press G

FOMA phone operation How to operate

Adjust the volume for

moving image/melody

playback

Scroll the List display by

page

Switch the Monthly

Schedule displays by month

While moving images/a melody is

played back ]FE

While each List display is

displayed ]FE

• The cursor is moved on some

displays.

While the Monthly Schedule

display is displayed ]FE

Zoom While the Still or Moving imaged

Finder screen is displayed ]FE

Incoming call ]Press Gfor 1

second

While an alarm / schedule alarm is

sounding ]Press E

Stop the alarm

Reject an incoming call

In Stand-by (Switch ON/OFF) ]

Switch the display light of

the sub display to ON

FOMA phone operation How to operate

Adjust the volume of a ring

tone for incoming call Incoming call ]FE

Adjust the volume of a ring

tone for incoming call Incoming call ]FE

In Stand-by ]FE

Adjust the volume of key tone

During a voice call/video-phone

call ]FE

Adjust the volume

Confirming before use

Using the UIM (FOMA Card)

Your phone number and contracted contents for the

service, etc. are recorded in the UIM. You need to insert it

into the FOMA phone to make/receive calls or perform

communication.

Refer to the UIM manual for details of how to use it.

Inserting/Removing UIM (FOMA Card)

Insert/remove the UIM after you turn off the power of the

FOMA phone and remove the rear cover and battery pack

beforehand (P39).

• Remove the AC adapter and options beforehand.

Inserting

1. Insert the UIM with its IC-side facing downwards

in the direction of the arrow underneath the guide.

Removing

1. Slide the UIM in the direction of the arrow to

remove it.

Confirming before use

Ç)égópëOÇÃämîF

Confirming before use

Information

• When inserting / removing the UIM, close the flip, and then put

it on your hand. Take care not to accidentally torch or scratch

the IC.

About Password of UIM

You can set 2 passwords, PIN1 and PIN2, for a UIM.

>P105

UIM Restriction Functions

The UIM has a restriction function to protect your data and

files.

If you obtain the following types of data and files with a

UIM inserted, restrictions are automatically imposed to

disable them when the UIM is not inserted or when

another UIM is inserted.

• Images/melodies/i-motion/i-appli obtained from sites

and Internet web pages

• Files attached to i-mode mail messages and

MessagesR/F

Differences of UIM

There are 2 types of UIM, the green, white and blue UIM and

the blue UIM. There are differences in specifications of the

following functions between those UIMs:

aAbout WORLD WING

WORLD WING is DoCoMo’s international roaming

service that allows you to use the same mobile pone

number for making and receiving calls after inserting

your UIM (Green) in a FOMA phone applicable to the

service or mobile phone available for overseas use

(WCDMA or GSM).

WORLD WING is available without subscription.

• If you subscribed to FOMA services before August

31, 2005 and have not subscribed to WORLD WING,

a separate subscription is required for WORLD WING.

• Some billing plans may not be applied to WORLD

WING.

UIM

(Green)

Function UIM (Blue)

Number of digits of the phone

number that can be stored in

the UIM phonebook

Up to 26 digits Up to 20 digits

WORLD WING Available Not available

Service dialing Available Not available

Confirming before use

• If the UIM (Green) is lost or stolen overseas, contact

DoCoMo immediately to suspend the service. For a

contact, see General Inquiries on the back cover of

this manual. Please be aware that call and

transmission charges made after loss or theft will be

charged to you.

Attaching/Removing the Battery Pack

Make sure that you attach the dedicated battery pack L02

for FOMA L602i to use it.

Attaching

1. Press the rear cover in the direction of the arrow 1

to slide it in the direction of the arrow 2, then lift it

up in the direction of the arrow 3to remove.

2. Insert the battery in the direction of the arrow 1

with the label facing downwards, then push it in

the direction of the arrow 2.

3. Adjust the rear cover to the ditch of the FOMA

phone holding the cover approx. 3mm off, then

press it in the direction of the arrow 1to slide it in

the direction of the arrow 2, then push it until it

clicks.

Confirming before use

Ç)égópëOÇÃämîF

Confirming before use

Removing

1. Press the rear cover in the direction of the arrow 1

to slide it in the direction of the arrow 2, then lift it

up in the direction of the arrow 3to remove.

2. Take the projection of the battery pack to lift it up

in the direction of the arrow.

Information

• Attach/remove the battery pack with the FOMA phone closed

and held in your hand after you turn off the power. In addition,

If you attach/remove the battery pack forcibly, it may damage

the charging connector of battery.

• Take care not to attach/remove the rear cover. Note that if the

rear cover is forcibly depressed, the slot of the rear cover may

be damaged.

• For details about the battery, see the manual for Battery Pack L02.

Charging the FOMA Phone

Charging

Connect specified AC Adapter (option) to charge the

battery after attaching the battery pack to the FOMA

phone (P39). You need FOMA AC Adapter 01 for both

overseas and domestic usage (option) separately when

using the FOMA phone overseas.

1. Open the cover of the external connector terminal

of the FOMA phone.

: You can rotate it forward or backward when it is open.

Confirming before use

2. While pressing the release buttons on both sides

of the connector of the AC adapter, connect it

horizontally to the FOMA phone with the arrows-

engraved side facing upwards in the direction of

the arrow.

3. Insert the AC adapter’s plug into a power socket.

• If you start to charge the battery, the charging start

tone will sound.

The battery level icon ( ) flashes on and off in turn

and it is red. After charging, the alarm tone for ending

the charging will ring and then the flashing disappears

and the LED turns off.

• If you charge the FOMA phone with the power off, the

animation for the battery level is displayed as follows,

depending on the battery level.

- In case the battery level is low: “Please wait” >

“Charging” >“Battery charged”

- In case the battery is empty: “Please wait” >“Low

battery Please wait” >“Charging” >“Battery

charged”

Information

• When you use the FOMA phone for the first time, the battery

pack is not fully charged. Fully charge the battery before using it.

• When you attach the AC adapter to the FOMA phone, do not

use unnecessary force. The FOMA phone and the connector

may be damaged.

• Do not remove the battery pack and the UIM during charging.

• If the battery cannot be charged correctly, turn off the power

once, remove the battery pack, and then reattach it to charge

the battery again.

• If the battery level becomes very low during a video-phone call,

connecting the AC adapter may not charge the battery fully,

and the power may go off.

• When charging the battery pack overseas, confirm the voltage

used in the country or the area of stay, and use FOMA

Overseas/Domestic AC Adapter 01 (option) (A conversion plug

AC100V

Confirming before use

Ç)égópëOÇÃämîF

Confirming before use

adapter for overseas travel applying to the country or area of

stay is required). Also, do not charge the battery pack using an

electric transformer for overseas travel.

• Refer to the instruction manuals for FOMA AC Adapter 01

(option) and FOMA AC Adapter 01 for both overseas and

domestic usage (option) for details.

Removing the AC Adapter

After charging completes, disconnect the AC adapter from

the FOMA phone.

1. Disconnect the connector of the AC adapter from

the power socket.

2. While pressing the release buttons on both sides

of the connector, remove it horizontally from the

FOMA phone in the direction of the arrow.

• Do not pull the connector forcibly. Malfunction may

result.

3. Close the cover of the external connector terminal

of the FOMA phone.

Checking the Battery Level

When turning the power on, the battery level (estimate)

icon is appeared.

• The Battery Level display indicates just an estimate of

the battery level.

: Almost full

: Getting low

: Almost empty. Charge the battery immediately.

When You Need to Charge the Battery

If the battery is completely flat, a message appears,

flickers, and the battery alarm sounds. If you press

, the

message disappears and the battery alarm stops.

Information

•

If you set “Manner mode” or “Original manner mode” and set

battery alarm to OFF, the alert tone does not ring.

Confirming before use

Precautions on the Battery Pack

Be sure to use the battery pack dedicated to the FOMA

phone.

aBattery life

• Batteries are consumables. The usage time of all

chargeable batteries shortens slightly each time they

are charged. The battery’s life is considered to be

exhausted when the usage time of the battery after

charging is about half the time it was at purchase.

(The life of the battery is about 1 year. However, it

may be shorter if used very frequently.)

aDo not charge for long periods of time (several days)

with the FOMA phone turned on.

• Do not leave the FOMA phone power on for long

periods of time while charging. Otherwise, when

charging finishes, the FOMA phone will attempt to

receive power from the battery so that when you

actually use the FOMA phone, you will be able to do

so for just a short amount of time before the battery

alarm sounds. If this happens, charge the battery

correctly. When charging the battery again, first

disconnect the FOMA phone from the AC adapter

and then set it again.

aEstimated usage time for battery

The usable time of the battery varies depending on the

usage environment or its remaining life.

• Continuous talk time is the estimated time when radio

waves can be sent and received normally.

• Continuous stand-by time is the estimated time you

can use the FOMA phone in motion when it is closed

and can receive radio waves normally. The standby

time could be about half of this estimate depending

on the battery level, function settings, other ambient

conditions such as temperature, the status of radio

waves in the area (weak or no radio waves, for

instance) and the status of the network of the country

in which you stay. The continuous standby time will

be shorter if you don't insert the UIM. When you use

i-mode communications, the talk/transmission time

and standby time will be shorter. Further, even if you

do not make calls or perform i-mode communication,

the talk/communication time and standby time will be

shorter if you compose i-mode mail, start up a

downloaded i-appli.

Stand-by time

Network Continuous talk time

FOMA / 3G Static : about 380 hrs

Dynamic : about 250 hrs

Voice call : about 140 min

Video call : about 90 min

GSM/GPRS Static : about 260 hrs Voice call: about 200 minutes

For environmental protection, bring the exhausted

battery to an NTT DoCoMo, dealer, or recycle shop.

Confirming before use

Ç)égópëOÇÃämîF

Confirming before use

• The continuous standby time for standstill is the

average number of hours you can use the FOMA

phone in standstill status when it is closed and can

receive radio waves normally.

• The continuous standby time for in motion is the

average number of hours you can use the FOMA

phone in the combined status of ”standstill”, “moving”

and “out of the service area” when it is closed, in an

area where it can receive radio waves normally.

• The talk/communication time and standby time will

also be shorter than the above-mentioned estimates

when you perform data transmission or multi-access

or when you use the camera.

aEstimated time for charging battery

• The estimated charging time is for when the FOMA

phone is off and the battery is being charged from

empty. The charging time will be longer if you charge

the battery with the power turned on.

aOther precautions

• Do not use any other adapter than the specified one.

It may shorten the life of the battery pack.

Turning Power ON

• Before you turn on the power, make sure that the UIM is

inserted and that the battery is fully charged.

1. Press Pfor 2 or more seconds

• After the Wake-up display is displayed, the Stand-by

display appears.

Information

•If “PIN code request” (P100) is set to “ON”, you need to enter

the PIN1 code.

•If “All lock” (P99) is set to “Power on”, you need to enter the

terminal security code.

Turning Power OFF

1. Press Pfor 2 or more seconds

• The Exit display appears and the power is turned off.

Information

•The time to turn off the FOMA phone may be long. Depending

on the status of network, the lead time may differ. During

switching off the power, do not repeat to power on/off.

FOMA AC Adapter 01 Approx. 180 minutes

Confirming before use

Date/Time

You can set the date and time and daylight saving time.

See “Setting Date & Time” (P95) for details of how to set

them up.

Using Caller ID Notification Service

The Caller ID Notification Service enables you to notify the

other party of your phone number when you make a call.

See “Using Caller ID Notification Service” (P202) for details

of how to set it up.

Own Number

You can display your phone number recorded in the UIM.

1. On the Stand-by display, C]0

• See “Displaying Own Number” (P72) for details of

how to change the settings on the Own Number

display.

Making calls............................................48

Receiving calls .......................................51

Using Public mode (drive mode) ...........52

Using Public mode (power off) ..............54

Making calls/

Receiving calls

Making calls/Receiving calls

Making calls

1. Enter the other party’s phone number

•Q:The last digit is cleared. To clear all digits,

press it for 1 or more seconds.

•C[Save]: You can register / add the entered phone

number to phonebook. Go to step 2 on page 64 of

“Adding to Phonebook”.

•I[Search]: You can search for the phone number in

phonebook. See the contents after step 3 on page 66.

2. A

]

Start talking when the other party answers

• Press Qfor 1 or more seconds: You can switch

ON/OFF the speaker phone.

3. Pto end the call after talking.

Information

• If you press Aafter entering the number from 0 to 9 in the

Enter Phone Number screen, you can make a call directly

matching the the number saved in memory.

• You can enter a phone number of up to 42 digits.

• If you enter a phone number exceeding 16 digits, dialing will be

made displaying the first 16 digits digits of the phone number.

• You can make a call after entering “184” (Not notify) or “186”

(Notify) in front of phone number.

• When the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone Set with Switch

(option) is attached, you can only talk on the Earphone /

Microphone regardless that the speaker phone is ON/OFF.

• When the call is disconnected, the alert sound sounds from a

receiver.

• When dialing/receiving overseas, some name of the other

party may not be displayed even that name is registered in the

phonebook.

Using the Submenus of the Enter Phone

Number Display

1. From the Enter Phone Number screen (See left),

M[Menu]

]

Select from the following submenu

items

Notify caller ID

Set whether to notify your phone number per call.

The other party's name Ŧ1

The other party's phone number

Call duration

The other party's picture Ŧ2

Ŧ1 : In case of the other party you don't

“Unregistered” will be displayed when

receiving or making a call.

Ŧ2 : The picture will be displayed when you

SaveMenu Search

Making calls/Receiving calls

–Not notify : “#31#” is added in front of the phone

number entered, but the phone number is not notified.

–Notify : “31#” is added in front of the phone

number entered, and the phone number is notified.

–Cancel : The added “#31#” or “ 31#” is deleted.

Select prefix

The number saved in “Setting Prefix Dial” (P92) is

added before the phone number is entered.

International call

The international access code saved in “International dial

setting” (P92) is added before the phone number is

entered.

Save

You can save the entered phone number entered into

the Phonebook. Go to step 2 on page 64 of “Adding

to Phonebook”.

Search phonebook

You can search for the phone number in phonebook. For

operations after searching, see 3 on page 66 of

“Searching for Phonebook Entries”.

Using the Submenus of the Talking screen

1. From the Talking screen (P48), M[Menu]

]

Select

from the following submenu items

New call 1

You can put the current call on make and hold a call

to another party.

End active call

You can disconnect the call.

Hold 1/Cancel held call 1

You can put/release the call on hold.

Mute 2/Unmute 2

You can mute/unmute the voice transmitted to the other

party.

1: Available only for Call Waiting Service subscribers.

To use this service, go to “Using Call Waiting Service” (P200).

2: Not displayed during call is held.

Making a Call From the Dialed/Received Call Record

1. From the Stand-by display, L/R/A/T

]

Select a record ]

Information

•See “Using the Submenu of the Received Calls display” (P86) for

submenus.

Making a Call from the Phonebook

1. Uin the Stand-by display, or search the

phonebook

]

Select the party you want to call

]

When multiple phone numbers are registered, press A

to display the Select call number screen, then select the

phone number and press C[Call].

Information

• To switch the phonebook list to display between the FOMA

phone and UIM, select M[Menu] >“View handset”/“View

UIM” on the phonebook list screen.

Making calls/Receiving calls

The name of DoCoMo's pocket bell has been changed to Quick Cast since January, 2001.

Using Pause Dial

You can use services such as sending messages to a

pocket bell, reserving tickets or checking the balance of

your bank account by sending push signal from the FOMA

handset.

1. Enter the phone number

2. Enter the dial data

• Press *3 times to enter pause “P”

• Only 0to 9,#,*and pause “P” can

be entered.

• Up to 42 digit can be entered.

• If you enter pause “P” before the phone number, you

can not dial.

3. A

• A call is made to the other party, and the dial data

from the beginning to the first pause “P” is displayed

while being connected.

4. Confirm that the other party accepted >Aor

C[Select]

• The dial data from the beginning to the first “P” is

sent, and the dial data to the next pause “P” is

displayed. Each time you press Aor C, the dial

data to the next “P” is sent. When you send the last

number, the calling screen appears.

Information

• The other party may not be able to receive the signal

depending on the type of the receiver's handset.

• When using video-phone call, you can not use pause dial.

International Calls

You can make an inteÎrnational call easily using the

DoCoMo international call service “WORLD CALL”.

When you have signed up for FOMA service, you have

contracted to use “WORLD CALL” (except those who

have applied not to use it).

• You can make calls to 240 countries and areas

worldwide.

aHow to make calls

009130 >010 >Country code >Area code >

Destination phone number >A

• This service is not available with some billing plans.

• Application/monthly fee for WORLD CALL is free of

charge.

• The WORLD CALL charges are added to your monthly

FOMA bill.

• Contact “DoCoMo Information Center” on the back of

this manual for inquiries about WORLD CALL.

• If the other party uses a specific 3G mobile phone

overseas, you can make an “International Video-phone

Call” by dialing out using Tafter following the dialing

method described above.

Making calls/Receiving calls

– See the International Service web page of DoCoMo for

the information about connectable countries and

telecommunications carriers.

– Images sent from the other party may blur on your

FOMA phone or you may not be able to connect,

depending on the other party’s phone used for the

international video-phone.

• When the area code begins with “0”, leave this out

when dialing. However, include “0” when making a call

to some countries or regions such as Italy.

Making an International Call Easily

• Confirm that the “Setting Prefix Dial” (P92) is set to

“AUTO” and “009130010” (WORLD CALL) is set for

“IDD prefix code” in “IDD prefix setting”.

1. On the Stand-by display, press 0for 1 or more

seconds to enter “+”

2. Enter Country code >Area code >Destination

phone number

]

A(T)

3. “Yes”

Confirmation with the test machine required.

4. Pto end the call after talking

Adjusting the Volume

1. Press FE Hduring a call or press Hfor 1 or more

seconds.

Information

• The changed volume is held even after ending the call.

Receiving calls

1. When you receive a call, A

•I[Silent]: You can set to no sound for incoming call.

If you subsequently press I[Reject], incoming call

will be rejected.

•P: You can reject the incoming call.

• If you close the handset while a call is incoming, the

call will be rejected.

2. Pto end the call after talking

Information

• When dialing/receiving overseas, some name of the other

party may not be displayed even that name is registered in the

phonebook.

The other party's name Ŧ2

The other party's phone number

The other party's image Ŧ1

Ŧ1 : Displayed only when the other party's

image is registered in the phonebook.

Ŧ2 : In case the other party's information is

not registered in the phonebook,

“Unregistered” will be displayed.

Making calls/Receiving calls

When you didn't get a call

When you could not answer the incoming voice call/video-

phone call, the following screen indicating a missed call

appears and the LED blinks for approx. 60 seconds.

•C[OK] : You can view the list of received calls.

•I[Close] : You can close the screen for missed calls.

Using the Submenu of the Ringing Display

1. From the Ringing screen (P51), M[Menu]

]

Select

from the following submenu items

Voice mail 1

The Call is connected to the Voice Mail Service

Center.

Call rejection

The call is disconnected without answering it.

Call forwarding 2

The call is forwarded to the registered phone number.

1: If you use voice mail menu, you should register this service

in operator. For details, see “Using voice mail” (P198).

2: If you use call forwarding menu, you should register this

service in operator. For details, please refer to the “Using

Call Forwarding Service” (P201).

Using Public mode (drive mode)

Public mode is an auto-answer service that puts stress on

manners in public spaces. When there is an incoming call

in Public mode, a guidance to the effect that you cannot

answer the call because you are driving a car or in a place

(train, bus, theater, etc.) that requires restraint from using a

phone is played for the caller and the call is disconnected.

• Public mode can be set/cancelled only from the stand-by

display (in addition, from a screen showing “ ”).

• You can make calls in Public mode.

• When there is an incoming call with “Deactivate caller ID

notification” set while caller ID request service is

“Activate”, a caller ID request guidance is played (no

Public mode guidance is played).

Setting the Public Mode (drive mode)

1. On the stand-by display ]Press *for 1 or more

seconds.

• The Public mode is set and is appeared.

The name not registered in

phonebook is not displayed.

Making calls/Receiving calls

aReleasing the Public Mode

• On the stand-by display, press *for 1 or more

seconds. The Public mode is released, and is

disappeared.

In Public mode

No ring alert sounds when there is an incoming voice/video-

phone call. It is recorded as “Missed calls” in “Received calls”

and displayed as “X Missed call” on the stand-by display.

• A guidance to the effect that you cannot answer the call

because you are driving a car or in a place that requires

restraint from using a phone is played for the caller and

the call is disconnected.

Operations while Network Service and Public mode

(drive mode) are both active

While Public mode (drive mode) and Network Service are

both active at the same time, the FOMA phone operations

as listed below. Depending on the settings and/or steps for

making a call, Network Service may have precedence,

disabling Public mode (drive mode) operations or recording

or display of missed calls.

aVoice Mail

aCall Waiting

aCall Forwarding Service

When a video-phone call is received

When a voice call is received

A Public mode (drive mode)

guidance is played for the caller

and the call is connected to Voice

Mail Service Center.

The call is terminated without being

connected to the Voice Mail

Service Center.

When a video-phone call is received

When a voice call is received

A Public mode (drive mode)

guidance is played for the caller

and the call is disconnected.

In Public mode (drive mode), a

Public mode (drive mode) video

guidance is played for the caller

and the call is disconnected.

When a video-phone call is received

When a voice call is received

A Public mode (drive mode)

guidance is played for the caller

and the call is connected to the

forwarding destination. Whether

the guidance is played to the other

party or not depends on the

setting of the Call Forwarding

Service.

The call is connected to the

forwarding destination, with no

Public mode (drive mode) video

guidance played for the caller.

Making calls/Receiving calls

aNuisance Call Blocking Service

aCaller ID Request Service

: When voice mail or call forwarding ring time is “0 sec”, no Public

mode (drive mode) guidance is played and the call is not

recorded in Received calls.

• This handset is not applicable to Voice Mail (Video-phone

call). Make a voice call to “1412” (free) and set not to be

applicable to video-phone call.

Information

In Public mode, the following sounds are not generated:

• Ring alert for incoming voice/video-phone calls

• Ring alert for incoming mail

• Ring alert for incoming MessageR/F

• Wake-up alarm sound (the icon blinks)

• Schedule alarm sound (the icon blinks)

• Battery exhaustion alarm sound

• The sound of the i-appli started by the setting of auto-start.

• Battery charging confirmation sound

The alarm sounds after releasing the public mode (drive mode).

Using Public mode (power off)

Public mode is an auto-answer service that lays stress on

manners in public spaces. Once you activate Public mode

(power off), the guidance is played back telling that you

cannot take the call as you are currently in a place

(in hospital, airplane, or in around priority seat in a train)

where use is prohibited. Then the call is disconnected.

Activate Public mode (power off)

1. *25251

]

• Public mode (power off) is set. (Nothing is changed in

the Stand-by display.)

When a voice call is received

When a video-phone call is received

• For a call with no caller ID

notified, a caller ID request

guidance is played for the caller

and the call is disconnected.

• For a call with caller ID notified, a

Public mode (drive mode)

guidance is played for the caller

and the call is disconnected.

• For a call with no caller ID

notified, a caller ID request video

guidance is played for the caller

and the call is disconnected.

• For a call with caller ID notified, a

Public mode (drive mode) video

guidance is played for the caller

and the call is disconnected.

When a voice call is received

When a video-phone call is received

• For a call from a caller registered

for nuisance call blocking, a call

rejection guidance is played for

the caller and the call is

disconnected.

• For a call from a caller not

registered, a Public mode (drive

mode) guidance is played for the

caller and the call is

disconnected.

• For a call from a caller registered

for nuisance call blocking, a call

rejection video guidance is

played for the caller and the call

is disconnected.

• For a call from a caller not

registered, a Public mode (drive

mode) guidance is played for the

caller and the call is

disconnected.

Making calls/Receiving calls

• After setting Public mode (power off) and turning off

the power, the guidance “The person you are calling

is currently in an area where use is prohibited. Please

try again later.” is played back for incoming calls.

aTo release Public mode (power off)

*25250 ]A

aTo check Public mode (power off) for the setting,

*25259 ]A

When Public mode (power off) is activated

When there is an incoming voice call, the guidance is

played back to the caller telling that you are currently in an

area where use is prohibited, and then the call is

disconnected. When there is an incoming video-phone

call, the video-guidance of the public mode is played back

to the caller, and then the call is disconnected.

• This setting is continued until you release the setting by

dialing “ 25250”. If you just switch on, this setting is not

released.

• The Public mode (power off) guidance is played back

even when you are out of the service area or radio

waves do not reach.

Activating between network services and Public

mode (power off)

If you use Public mode (power off) and Network service at

the same time, the operation will be activated as follow.

Depending on the setting or calling, the network service

can be preferred, so the activation of Public mode (power

off) or the record of missed call may not be displayed.

aVoice Mail

aCall Forwarding Service

Response to Incoming Video-phone calls

Response to Incoming Voice calls

Plays back the Public mode

(power off) guidance to caller, and

then the call is connected to the

Voice mail Service Center.

The call is terminated without being

connected to the Voice Mail

Service Center.

Response to Incoming Voice calls

Response to Incoming Video-phone calls

Plays back the Public mode

(power off) guidance to caller, and

then the call is forwarded to the

forwarding destination.

The

guidance depends on setting of

Call Forwarding Service.

Does not play back the video

guidance for Public mode, and the

call is forwarded to the forwarding

destination. If the destination does

not support video-phone call, the

call is disconnected.

Making calls/Receiving calls

aNuisance Call Blocking Service

aCaller ID Display Request

1: When voice mail or call forwarding ring time is set to

“0 sec”, no Public mode (power off) guidance is played.

2: This handset is not applicable to Voice Mail (Video-phone

call). Make a voice call to “1412” (free) and set not to be

applicable to video-phone call.

Response to Incoming Voice calls

Response to Incoming Video-phone calls

• When the caller is registered to

the Nuisance Call Blocking

Service, the guidance of the call

rejection is played to the caller

and the call is terminated.

• In other cases, the guidance of

the public mode (power off) is

played to the caller and the call

is terminated.

• When the caller is registered to

the Nuisance Call Blocking

Service, the image guidance of

the call rejection is played to the

caller and the call is terminated.

• In other cases, the guidance of

the public mode (power off) is

played to the caller and the call is

terminated.

Response to Incoming Voice calls

Response to Incoming Video-phone calls

• For the caller without a caller ID,

plays back the Caller ID Request

guidance, and then the call is

disconnected.

• For the caller with a caller ID,

plays back the Public mode

(power off) guidance, and then

the call is disconnected.

• For the caller without a caller ID,

plays back the video guidance

for Caller ID Request, and then

the call is disconnected.

• For the caller with a caller ID,

plays back the video guidance for

Public mode (power off), and

then the call is disconnected.

About Video-phone ................................58

Making Video-phone Calls.....................58

Receiving Video-phone Calls.................60

Changing Settings for

Video-phone Calls..................................61

Making/Receiving

Video-phone calls

Making/Receiving Video-phone calls

About Video-phone

When both you and the other party use DoCoMo's video-

phones, you can talk seeing each other's image.

• DoCoMo video-phones conform to 3G – 324M 2

standardized by the international standard 3GPP 1.

You cannot connect to the video-phone that uses a

different format.

1 : 3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project) is the regional

standards organization for developing common technical

specifications for third-generation mobile

telecommunications systems (IMT–2000).

2 : 3G–324M is the international standard for the third

generation of mobile video-phones.

• The video-phone call is activated at the speed of 64K

bytes.

Making Video-phone Calls

1. Enter the other party’s phone number

• The Enter Phone Number screen (P48) is displayed.

2. T]Start talking when the other party answers

• The voice of the other party is heard from the

speaker when the call starts.

• Press Qfor 1 or more second: You can switch

ON/OFF the speaker phone.

•C[Image]/[Camera]: You can switch between

Substitutive image and your photo image for sending

to the other party.

•I[Hold]/[Active]: You can put the call on hold or

release hold. While the call is put on hold, a

substitutive image is sent to the other party.

•T: Rotate an image.

3. Press Pto end the call after talking

Information

• See “International Calls” (P50) for how to make international calls.

• When the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone Set with Switch (option)

is attached, you can only talk on the Earphone/ Microphone

regardless of whether the speaker phone is ON/OFF.

Using the Submenu of the Enter Phone

Number screen

See “Using the Submenus of the Enter Phone Number

screen” (P48) of voice calls for the submenus available.

The other party's image

The volume during a call

Call duration

Own image

Menu HoldImage

Description

Mark

Speaker phone ON/OFF

Zooming magnification

Making/Receiving Video-phone calls

Using the Submenus of the Talking screen

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P253

1. From the Talking screen (P58), M[Menu] ]Select

from the following submenu items

End call

The call is disconnected.

Hold

You can put the call on hold. You can cancel the

function by pressing I[Active].

Substitutive image/Camera image

You can switch to the Substitutive image for sending

to the other party. >P94

Camera settings

You can set the camera of Video-phone call. You can

select the icon by pressing J. After setting, press I

[Close].

–Zoom : The camera image is zoomed. (x1/x2)

–Brightness : You can change the brightness of

photo images.

–Night mode : You can set it up when using the

camera in a dark place.

Video-phone settings

You can set the display of Video-phone call. After

setting, press I[Done]. >P93

–Display setting : You can set the display method

for the Talking screen.

• Both : The other party’s image and your image

are displayed.

• Other : Only the other party’s image is displayed.

• Me : Only your image is displayed.

–Sub screen : If you select “Both” of “video-phone

settings”, you can set the image which displayed

each screen.

• Me : Only your image is displayed.

• Other : Only the other party's image is displayed.

–Display light: You can set the lighting method of

the backlight on the Talking screen.

•Always on : Always lights during a call.

•Terminal setting : Follows the settings on the

“Main screen” of the “Backlight”. >P83

Sending image quality

You can set the quality of images to be sent to the

other party.

–Normal : Sends images in standard quality and

motion speed.

–Prefer motion quality : Sends images laying stress

on motion speed. Prefer motion quality is effective

for moving images.

–Prefer image quality : Sends images laying stress

on image quality. Prefer image quality is effective if

there is little motion.

Making/Receiving Video-phone calls

Making a Video-phone call from the

Dialed/Received Call Record

1. On the Stand-by display, L/R/A/T]Select

a history ]T

Information

• See “Using the Submenu of the Received Call Record Screen”

(P86) for the submenu.

Making a Video-phone Call from the

Phonebook

1. On the Stand-by display U, or Search for

phonebook entries (P66) ]Select a party to call ]

When multiple phone numbers are registered, press Tto

display the Select call number screen, then select the

phone number and press C[Call].

Information

• To switch the phonebook to display between the FOMA

phone and UIM, select M[Menu] >Select “View handset” /

“View UIM”.

Adjusting the Volume

1. Press H/FE during a call.

Information

• The changed volume is held even after ending the call.

Receiving Video-phone Calls

1. When you receive a call, T/A

•C[Image]: You can receive a call. The substitutive

image will be sent to the other party.

•P: You can put the call on hold. The holding

image will be sent to the other party. If you press C,

you can answer the call.

•T: Rotate an image.

• If you close the handset while a call is incoming, the

call will be rejected.

2. Pto end the call after talking

The other party's name Ŧ2

The other party's phone number

The other party's image Ŧ1

Ŧ1 : Displayed only when the other party's

image is registered in the phonebook.

Ŧ2 : In case the other party's information is

not registered in the phonebook,

“Unregistered” will be displayed.

Making/Receiving Video-phone calls

Information

• When inserting the switch of the Flat-plug Earphone/

Microphone set with Switch (option), you can connect a call

by earphone regardless of Speakerphone ON/OFF.

• If you answer a video-phone call by pressing the switch of the

Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone set with Switch (option) when

closing the flip, the substitutive image will be sent.

Using the Submenus of the Ringing screen

See “Using the Submenus of the Ringing screen” (P51) of

voice calls for the submenus available. Note that “Voice

mail” is not displayed for video-phone calls.

Changing Settings for Video-phone Calls

C](Settings) ]3

You can set the operation and display for video-phone

calls. See “Setting Operation and Display for video-phone

Calls” (P93) and “Selecting an Image for video-phone

Calls” (P94) for details of the settings.

Adding to Phonebook ............................64

Searching for Phonebook Entries..........66

Checking the Number of Saved

Phonebook Entries.................................70

Setting Phonebook.................................70

Setting Groups .......................................71

Displaying Own Number ........................72

Phonebook

On the Stand-by display, C[Menu] ]

(Phonebook) or “Phonebook”

To display the Phonebook menu

Select

Phonebook

1 Add to phonebook

2 Seach phonebook

3 No. of phonebook

4 Phonebook settings

5 Group settings

6 Own number

Select

Phonebook

Adding to Phonebook

C](Phonebook) ]1

2 types of phonebooks are available, the phonebook

saved in the handset of the FOMA phone and the

phonebook saved in UIM.

1. From the Phonebook menu (P63), “Add to

phonebook”

2. Select an item to save

Handset / FOMA card (UIM)

Select a storage location of the Phonebook (Handset

/ UIM).

Name

Enter a name. Unless you enter a name, the

Phonebook entry cannot be saved.

Reading

Enter reading of the name. Automatically inserted if

you enter “Name”.

Number 1 ~ 5 1

Enter a phone number. If you press M[Icon] after

entering, you can set a mark other than .

Mail addr 1 – 3 1

Enter a mail address. If you press M[Icon] after

entering, you can set a mark other than .

Group (Handset)/ Group

FOMA card (UIM)

Select a group to save.

Image 2

Select an image to be displayed on dialing / receiving

calls screen, talking screen, phonebook list screen

and phonebook detail screen.

–No image : No image is set.

–Character: You can set the character. Select the

part (Face, Hair, Tops, Bottoms, Acc., Scenery) by

pressing H, and then select the item by pressing

J. After setting, press C.

–Select picture : You can select from images saved

in “My picture” of “Data box”. >P166

–Take picture: You can start a camera. Go to step 2

on page 109 of “Shooting Still Images”. The size of

image 80x96 cannot be changed.

Set ringtone 2

You can set a ring tone for when you receive a voice /

video-phone call from registered caller.

–Data box : You can select from melodies saved in

“Melody” of “Data box”. >P176

Name

Reading

Number1

Mail addr1

No group

Handset

Add to phonebook

SaveSelect

Phonebook

–Terminal setting : Go to the settings of “Select ring

tone”. >P76

Set mail ringtone 2

You can set a ring tone for when you receive mail

from registered party.

–Data box: You can select from melodies saved in

“Melody” of “Data box”. >P176

–Terminal setting: Follows the settings of

“ringtone”. >P76

URL 2

You can enter a URL.

Postal code 2

You can enter a postal code.

Home addr. 2

You can enter a home address.

Company name 2

You can enter a company name.

Job title 2

You can enter a job title.

Company addr. 2

You can enter a company address.

Memo 2

You can enter a memo.

Secret Code 3

Set to the secret code.

1 : Only 1 entry can be saved if the storage location for the

Phonebook is set to “FOMA card (UIM)”.

2 : Not displayed if the storage location for the Phonebook is set

to “FOMA card (UIM)”.

3 : For secret code, refer to “Mobile Phone User's Guide

[i-mode]”.

3. After storing, I[Save] ] Enter a memory number

(0-499) ]C

Saving in UIM

1. From the Saving Phonebook Entries screen (P64),

select the (Handset) field ]Select using J

2. Enter required items

• See (P64) of “Adding to Phonebook” for details of the

items.

3. I[Save]

Information

• For phone numbers of the Phonebook saved in Memory No

0 – 9 (1 saved in “Number1”), if you press 0~9and then

press A(T) from the Stand-by display, you can make a

voice (video-phone) call.

• 500 Phonebook entries can be saved in the FOMA phone and

50 Phonebook entries can be saved in the UIM. Note that the

number of savable entries may be smaller depending on the

saved contents. >P70

Phonebook

Searching for Phonebook Entries

C](Phonebook) ]2

You can display the Phonebook in the FOMA phone / UIM

specifying a search method.

1. From the Phonebook menu (P63), “Search

phonebook”

•I[UIM]/[Handset]: You can switch Phonebook

Search screens between the FOMA phone and the

UIM.

2. Select the following search method

Show all data

Press the buttons 1~0corresponding to the

50 Japanese syllables (corresponding to Columns) for

searching. If you press *, you can search for Other

item. You can switch tab of the 50 syllabary by

pressing J.

Group search

You can specify a group for searching. (Group 1~30

(FOMA Handset) / 1~10 (UIM)). After searching, you

can switch groups by pressing J.

Reading search

You can search by entering some of the characters

contained in the reading of the name.

Memory No. search

You can search by using a memory number (0-499).

You can switch tab of the memory number by pressing

Phone No. search

You can search by entering part of the phone

number.

Domain search

You can search by specifying a domain. You can

switch domains using J.

• To create a domain to specify, see “Creating a

domain list” (P70).

: Not selectable on the Phonebook Search display of UIM.

3. The Phonebook List meeting the search method is

displayed.

•A/T: You can make a voice call or video-phone

call to the selected phone number saved in

phonebook.

However, when multiple phone numbers are

registered, press A/Tto display the Select call

number screen, then select the phone number and

press C[Call].

Phonebook

•I[Mail] : You can compose i-mode mail to selected

mail address or phone number registered in the

selected phonebook. Go to step 3 on page 149 of

“Composing i-mode mail”. When multiple mail

addresses or phone numbers are registered in the

phonebook, press I[Mail] to display the destination

selection screen, then select the destination.

: If the mail address or phone number is not

registered in the phonebook, you cannot use this

function.

4. Select the desired Phonebook

]

•A/T: You can make a voice call or video-phone

call to the phone number saved in phonebook.

When multiple phone numbers are registered, the

Select call number screen is displayed, and select

the phone number and press C[Call].

•C[Call] : You can make a call to selected phone

number.

•C[Mail] : You can compose an i-mode mail to

selected mail address saved in phonebook. Go to

step 3 on page 149 of “Composing i-mode mail”.

•C[Connect] : You can connect the web page of

selected URL.

Using the Submenus of the Phone List

display

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P253

1.From the Phonebook List screen (P60), M[Menu]

]

Select from the following submenu items

View UIM 4/FOMA phone phonebook display 5

Switch between UIM phonebook and FOMA phone

phonebook displays.

Search ctgry menu 1

–

Handset

/UIM

Group settings :

After “Group

search”, you can set the each displayed group in the

phonebook list screen. Go to step 2 on page 71 of

“Using the Submenus of the Group Settings screen”.

–Input char chg: You can switch entry modes for

the Character Entry column displayed at the top of

the phonebook list screen after “Reading search”.

–Return to input: You can return without “Input

character change”.

–Create domain list: You can create a new domain

list from the Phone List display after “Domain search”.

Go to step 2 on page 70 of “Creating a Domain List”.

Phonebook

Mail/URL 2

–Compose mail: The mail address or phone number

saved in the selected Phonebook is entered into the

destination. Go to step 3 on page 149 of

“Composing i-mode mail message”.

–Compose SMS: The phone number saved in the

selected Phonebook is entered into the destination. Go

to step 3 on page 152 of “Creating SMS”.

–Connect to URL: Connected to the web page with

the URL saved in the selected Phonebook.

Add new

You can create a new phonebook. Go to step 2 on page

64 of “Adding to Phonebook” for items to be saved.

Edit

You can edit the selected Phonebook. Go to step 2 on

Page 64 of “Adding to Phonebook” for items to be saved.

Send Ir data 3

For Infrared Communication, see “Using the Infrared

Communication” (P182).

–Focused data: Send a selected phonebook entry via

infrared communication.

–All data: Send all phonebook entries via infrared

communication.

Search by

You can select another search method to display a

phonebook. For the searching method, Go to step 2 on

page 66 of “Searching for Phonebook Entries”.

Copy

–Copy to UIM 4:You can copy the Phonebook

selected to the UIM.

–Select copy to UIM 4:You can copy multiple

Phonebooks selected to the UIM. If you press M,

you can select “All data”. After selecting, press

I[Done].

–Copy to handset 5:You can copy the Phonebook

selected to the handset of the FOMA phone.

–Select copy to handset 5:You can copy multiple

Phonebooks selected to the handset of the FOMA

phone. If you press M, you can select “All data”. After

selecting, press I[Done].

Delete

–Delete: You can delete the selected Phonebook.

–Delete selected: You can delete the multiple

Phonebooks selected. If you press M, you can

select all data. After selecting, press I[Done].

–Delete all 6:You can delete all Phonebooks. To

delete all Phonebooks, your terminal security code is

required.

Display image 7

If an image is registered in phonebook list, you can

set whether to display the image or not. >P71

Int'l call (Japan) 8

Make a call to a phone number registered in the

selected phonebook. >P227

This submenu appears only while International

roaming service is active.

Phonebook

1: You can user phonebook list by Group search except for “No

group”, “Reading search”, “Phone No. search” and “Domain

search”. You may not be able to select it depending on the

search method or storage status of the selected Phonebook.

2: You cannot select it if no phone number/mail address/URL is

stored in the selected Phonebook.

3: Not selected in Phonebook for UIM.

4: Displayed on the Phonebook of the handset.

5: Displayed on the Phonebook of the UIM.

6: If you perform “Delete all” while checking new i-mode

mail/SMS or activating i-appli, active functions are terminated

and returns to Stand-by screen.

7: No image is displayed on the Phonebook of the UIM.

8: Does not appear within Japan.

Using the Submenus of the Detailed

Phonebook Display

From the Detailed Phonebook screen (P67), M[Menu]

]Select from the following submenu items

Mail/URL 1

–Compose mail: The mail address or phone number

saved in the phonebook displayed is entered into

the Address. Go to step 3 (P149) of “Composing i-

mode mail message”.

–Compose SMS: The phone number saved in the

phonebook displayed is entered into the Address. Go

to step 3 (P152) of “Composing SMS”.

–Connect to URL: Connected to the homepage of

the URL saved in the Phonebook displayed.

Edit

You can edit the phonebook. Go to step 2 on page

64 of “Adding to Phonebook”.

Send Ir data 2

For details, please refer to “Using the Infrared

Communication Function” (P182).

Copy to UIM 3

You can copy the phonebook entry to the UIM.

Copy to handset 4

You can copy the phonebook entry to the FOMA handset.

Delete

You can delete the phonebook entry.

Int'l call (Japan) 5

Make a call to a phone number registered in the

selected phonebook. >P227

1: You cannot select it if no phone number/mail address/URL is

stored in the selected Phonebook.

2: Not selected in Phonebook for UIM.

3: Displayed during displaying the Phonebook of the handset of

the FOMA phone.

4: Displayed during displaying the Phonebook of the UIM.

5: Does not appear within Japan.

Phonebook

Checking the Number of Saved

Phonebook Entries

C](Phonebook) ]3

You can check the number of phonebook entries saved in

the handset of the FOMA phone and in the UIM as well as

the number of phonebook entries available.

From the Phonebook menu (P63), “No. of phonebook”

Information

• Actual savable number of phonebook may be smaller

depending on the contents saved in Phonebook.

Setting Phonebook

Setting Display Data

C](Phonebook) ]41

You can set whether to display the phonebook of the

handset of the FOMA phone or the phonebook of the UIM

when displaying a phonebook.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P241, P242

1. From the Phonebook menu (P63), “Phonebook

settings” ]“Display data” ]“Handset only”/“UIM

only”

Creating a Domain List

C](Phonebook) ]42

You can store domains to be used when doing “Domain

Search” (P66).

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P242

1. From the Phonebook menu (P63), “Phonebook

settings” ]“Create domain list”

•I[Disp.] 1: You can view all domain registered in a list.

•M[Delete] 2: You can delete the domain saved.

1: You cannot use this menu when you select no input screen.

2: You cannot use this menu when you select

“@docomo.ne.jp” or no input screen.

2. Select the domain list field

]

]Enter a domain

]

Selecting a Search Method

C(Phonebook) 43

You can set the search method for when you press Uon

the Stand-by display and bring up the phonebook search

display.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P242

1. From the Phonebook menu (P63), “Phonebook

settings”

]

“Search by”

]

Select a search method

• Go to step 2 on page 66 of “Searching the

Phonebook Entries” for the search method.

Phonebook

Information

• If the “Display data” (See left) is set to “UIM only”, you cannot

select “Memory No. search”.

Displaying Images

C](Phonebook) ]44

You can set whether to display the image set when

selecting a phonebook with “ (image setting)” set (P64)

on the phonebook list screen.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P242

1. From the Phonebook menu (P63), “Phonebook

settings”

]

“Display image”

]

“ON”/“OFF”

Setting Groups

C](Phonebook) ]5

You can save the group name for Group of the

phonebook. You can also set a ring tone for each group.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P242

1. From the Phonebook menu (P63), “Group settings”

• Group settings display appears.

•I[UIM]/[Handset]: You can switch the Group settings

displays between the FOMA phone (handset) and the

UIM.

2. Select the group to set

]

Select the following

item to register

]

After setting, press I[Finish]

Group name

You can save the name of the group.

Ringtone

You can set a ring tone for when a call comes in.

–Data box: You can select from the melodies stored

in “Melodies” of “ Data box”. >P176

–Terminal setting: Follows the settings of

“ringtone”. >P76

Mail ringtone

You can set a ring tone for when mail comes in.

–Data box: You can select from the melodies saved

in “Melody” of “Data box”. >P176

–Terminal setting: Follows the settings of “Select

ringtone”. >P76

: Not displayed on the Group setting display of the UIM.

Information

• You cannot set to “No group”.

Phonebook

Using the Submenus of the Group Settings

Screen

1. From the Group Settings screen, M[Menu]

]

Select from the following submenu items

Reset 1

You can reset the settings of the group selected.

Move 2

You can change the order of the group selected.

Edit

You can edit the group selected. Go to step 2 (P71) of

“Setting Groups”.

Reset all 3

You can reset the settings and orders of all groups.

1: You cannot use this menu when the selected group is not edited.

2: You cannot use this menu in FOMA card group setting screen.

3: You cannot use this menu when not moving or editing any

group.

Displaying Own Number

C](Phonebook) ]6

You can display your phone number recorded in the UIM.

1. From the Phonebook menu (P63), “Own number”

• The Own number screen appears.

Information

•

You can also check your own number by pressing

from

the Stand-by display.

Displaying Details of Own Number

1. From the Own number screen, C

[Detail]

]

Enter

your terminal security code

]

• The Detail screen appears.

•A/T: You can make a voice/ video-phone call

by the number registered in. (except own number)

When multiple phone numbers are registered, the

Select call number screen is displayed, and select

the phone number and press C[Call].

•C[Call] : You can make a voice call to the selected

phone number.

: You cannot use your own number.

•C[Mail]: You can compose i-mode mail to selected

mail address. Go to step 3 on page 149 of

“Composing i-mode Mail”.

•C[Connect]: You can connect the homepage of

selected URL.

Phonebook

Using the Submenu of the Detail Screen

1. From the Detail Screen, M

[Menu]

]

Select from

the following submenu items

Mail/URL 1

–Compose mail: The mail address registered in my

number will be entered to destination. Go to step 3

on page 149 of “Composing i-mode Mail”.

–Compose SMS

:The phone number registered in

my number will be entered to destination. Go to step

3 on page 152 of “Composing SMS message”.

–Connect to URL: You can connect the homepage

of URL registered in my number.

Edit

You can store your own information. For adding

method, go to step 2 on page 64 of “Adding to

Phonebook”. However, your number registered in

“ (Own number)” cannot be edited.

Send Ir data 3

You can send your own number through infrared

communication. For details related to infrared

communication, go to “Using the Infrared

Communication Function” on P182.

Reset 4

You can reset the edited own number information to

its default.

1: You cannot use this menu if the phone number/mail/URL are

not registered.

2: You cannot use the menu even if you operate the number

registered in own number.

3: You cannot use this menu during a call.

4: You cannot use this menu when the own number information is

not registered.

Adjusting the Ring Volume ....................76

Adjusting the Effect Tone Volume .........76

Setting a Ring Tone................................76

Setting an Effect Tone ...........................77

Setting a Vibrator ...................................78

Activating the Manner Mode .................78

Setting Ringing Operations for

Incoming Mail ........................................79

Setting Ringing Time..............................80

Setting Main Screen...............................80

Setting Sub Display................................82

Setting Fonts of Dial Characters ...........83

Setting Menu Style .................................83

Setting Backlight ....................................83

Setting color Scheme.............................84

Setting LED.............................................84

Sound/

Display

1 Ring volume

2 Effect tone volume

3 Select ringtone

4 Select effect tone

5 Vibration settings

6 Manner settings

7 Mail ring duration

Select

Sound

On the Stand-by display, C[Menu] ]

(Sound) or “Sound”

To display the Sound menu

1 Main display

2 Sub display

3 Font

4 Menu style

5 Backlight

6 Color scheme

7 Lighting LED

Select

Display

On the Standby display, C[Menu] ]

(Display) or “Display”

To display the Display menu

Sound/Display

Adjusting the Ring Volume

C](Sound) ]1

Setting items/Setting at purchase >P244

1. From the Sound menu (P75), “Ring volume” ]

Select from the following adjustment items ]

After setting,I[Done]

Voice call

You can adjust the ring tone volume for voice calls.

Video-phone

You can adjust the ring tone volume for video-phone

calls.

Mail tone

You can adjust the ring tone volume for mail.

MessageR tone

You can adjust the ring tone volume for MessageR.

MessageF tone

You can adjust the ring tone volume for MessageF.

SMS tone

You can adjust the ring tone volume for SMS.

Information

• When you receive mail, messageR/F or SMS on opening the

flip, the alarm sound will be fixed to level 1 regardless of each

setting of “Ring volume”. However, if you set level 0 of ring

tone, the alarm does not sound.

Adjusting the Effect Tone Volume

C](Sound) ]2

Setting items/Setting at purchase >P244

1. From the Sound menu (P75), “Effect tone volume”

]Select from the following adjustment items ]

After setting,I[Done]

Key tone

You can adjust the key pad sound volume.

Power ON/OFF

You can adjust the tone volume for when turning the

FOMA phone on/off.

Flip tone

You can adjust the tone volume for when opening or

closing the FOMA phone.

Feedback tone

You can adjust the tone volume for when a popup

appears.

Setting a Ring Tone

C](Sound) ]3

You can set the ring tone for voice call, video-phone call or

mail. In addition to ring alerts and melodies registered by

default, you can set melodies and/or i-motion downloaded

from i-mode sites and web pages as incoming ring alerts.

You can set the SMF, MFI or MP4 file as a ringtone.

Sound/Display

•

For the melody registered at purchase, see “List of

melody” (P251).

Setting items/Setting at purchase >P245

1. From the Sound menu (P75), “Select ringtone” ]

Select from the following adjustment items ]

After setting, I[Done]

• Select from the melodies stored in “Melody” or

“i-motion” in “Data box” respectively. >P176

• On a folder list screen, press Qto switch between

“Melody” and “i-motion”.

Voice call

You can select a ring tone for voice calls.

Video-phone

You can select a ring tone for video-phone calls.

Mail tone

You can select a ring tone for mail.

MessageR tone

You can select a ring tone for messageR.

MessageF tone

You can select a ring tone for messageF.

SMS tone

You can select a ring tone for SMS.

Information

• If you have set a ring tone depending on the voice call/ video

phone call/ Mail, the ring tone is preferred. The priority order is

as follows:

1Ringtone set in the FOMA phone’s phonebook >Set the

phonebook (P64)

2Ringtone set for a group of the FOMA phone’s phonebook

>Set group (P71)

3Ringtone volume/Video call ring tone/Mail, Message ring

tone >Select the ring tone (P76)

Setting an Effect Tone

C](Sound) ]4

Setting items/Setting at purchase >P245

1. From the Sound menu (P75), “Select effect tone” ]

Select from the following adjustment items ]After

setting, I[Done]

Key tone

You can set to emit an effect tone for when you touch

the buttons. The effect tone does not sound when

setting to “OFF”.

Power ON/OFF

You can set whether to emit an effect tone for when

you switch ON/OFF the FOMA phone.

Flip tone

You can set whether to emit an effect tone for when

you open/close the FOMA phone.

Feedback tone

You can set whether to emit an effect tone for when a

popup appears.

Sound/Display

Setting a Vibrator

C](Sound) ]5

Setting items/Setting at purchase >P245

1. From the Sound menu (P75), Vibration settings ]

Select from the following setting items ]After

setting, I[Done]

Incoming call

You can select a vibration pattern for when a voice

call or a video-phone call comes in.

–melody+vibration: The vibration and the melody

for incoming call are activated at the same time.

–Pattern 1(Vibration only): This activates the

vibration to pattern 1. Regardless of ring tone, the

tone for incoming call does not sound.

–Pattern 2(Vibration only): This activates the

vibration to pattern 2. Regardless of ring tone, the

tone for incoming call does not sound.

–OFF: The vibration is not activated in FOMA phone.

Message

You can set a vibration pattern for when mail,

messageR/F or SMS comes in.

–melody+vibration: The vibration and the melody

for incoming call are activated at the same time.

–Pattern 1(Vibration only): This activates the

vibration to pattern 1. Regardless of ring tone, the

tone for incoming call does not sound.

–Pattern 2(Vibration only): This activates the

vibration to pattern 2. Regardless of ringtone, the

tone for incoming call does not sound.

–OFF: The vibration is not activated in FOMA phone.

Activating the Manner Mode

You can set whether to mute the ring tone, key pad sound

and any other sound from the speaker to avoid annoying

people around you. If the manner mode is activated, an

incoming call or alarm, etc. is notified with vibrator.

• You can change the activation on setting manner mode

to “Original manner mode”. >P79

1. From the Stand-by display, press #for 2 or

more seconds

•

The handset of the FOMA phone vibrates displaying

(blue/in the Original manner mode) or (pink/in

the Manner mode).

• You can cancel it by pressing #for 2 or more

seconds with the Manner mode activated.

Changing Manner Modes

C](Sound) ]6

You can change operations in the Manner mode.

Setting at purchase >P245, P246

1. From the Sound menu (P75), “Manner settings” ]

Select from the following setting items

Sound/Display

Manner mode

You can set the Manner mode.

Original manner mode

You can customize operations in the Manner mode.

After setting, press I[Done].

–Incoming call sound: You can set whether to

make the ring tone sound when a voice call or

video-phone call comes in.

–Incoming call vib.: You can set whether to vibrate

the phone when a voice call or video-phone call

comes in.

–Message sound: You can set whether to make the

ring tone sound when mail, messageR/F or SMS

comes in.

–Message vibration: You can set whether to vibrate

the phone when mail, messageR/F or SMS comes

in.

–Key tone: You can set whether to make the key

operation sound when you do key operations.

–Flip tone: You can set whether to make an effect

tone sound when you open or close the FOMA

phone.

–Low battery tone: You can set whether to make a

battery alarm tone sound when the battery is flat.

Information

• The following sounds are emitted even when the manner

mode is activated.

– The shutter tone on shooting still and moving image. >P110

– The alert tone for disconnecting a call. >P48, P51

– The alert tone to reconnect >P91

– The alert tone for the quality of calling >P92

• If you try to play the melody, moving image or i-motion on

manner mode, the confirmation screen appears and you can

select whether to play with sounds.

Setting Ringing Operations for Incoming Mail

C](Sound) ]7

You can set whether to make the ring tone sound when

mail or SMS comes in. You can also set ringing duration

and cycle of rings.

Setting items/Setting at purchase >P246

1. From the Sound menu (P75), “Mail ring duration” ]

Select from the following setting items ]After

setting, I[Done]

Mail ring ON/OFF

You can set whether to make the ring tone sound

when mail comes in. If you select “ON”, you can set

the ringing duration or cycle of ringing.

Mail ring duration

You can set ringing time and number of rings for the

ringing tone.

–Time: After selecting Sec. section by pressing D,

you can enter the duration of ringing.

Sound/Display

–Cycle: After selecting Cycle section by pressing D,

you can enter the number of cycle.

Setting Ringing Time

C](Sound) ]8

You can specify the mute time in seconds before ringing

starts when a voice call or video-phone call which is not

registered in phonebook comes in. This function is effective

as a countermeasure for nuisance calls such as 1 ring phone

scam.

Setting items/Setting at purchase >P246

1. From the Sound menu (P75), Select “Set mute

seconds” ]Enter ring time. ]I[Done]

Information

• If the voice call or video-phone call which are not registered in

phonebook disconnects within the setting ringing time, they are

not recorded in received call list.

Setting Main Screen

You can set the display for stand-by display or

Incoming/outgoing screen as Main display.

You can set the maximum of the image size of 1280 x

1024, the file size of JPEG file to 700K bytes and the file

size of GIF file to 500K bytes on the Stand-by display.

Depending on the image, some cannot be set properly.

• When the image saved in stand-by mode, making and

receiving a call at purchase, please refer to “Pre-installed

data” (P260)

Setting the Stand-by Display

C](Display) ]11

You can set wallpapers and clock displays for the Stand-

by display.

Setting items/Setting at purchase >P246

1. From the Display Menu (P75), “Main display” ]

“Stand-by display” ]Select from the following

setting items ]After setting, I[Done]

Wallpaper

–Select type field 1

• Select file ... Select an image saved in “My picture”

of “Data box” from “Select file/Clock theme field”.

• Clock theme ... Select a clock theme from “Select

file/Clock theme field”.

–Select file/Clock theme field 1:Select an image

(P166) or a clock theme saved in “My picture” of

“Data box”.

• The selectable items may differ depending on the

settings of “Select type field”.

Sound/Display

Display items 2

–Select display type field 1

• Clock ... Display a digital clock on the stand-by

screen. You can select the type of the clock by

“Select clock/city field”.

• Dual clock ... Display 2 cities and times on the stand-

by screen. You can select the city of the second time

displayed lower by “Select clock/city field”. 3

• Calendar + Clock ... Display both calendar and

clock on the stand-by screen. You can select the

font color of the clock by “Clock font color”.

• Do not show ... Do not display the clock on the

stand-by screen.

–Select clock/city field 1 4:Select the type of the

digital clock or a city.

• The selectable items may differ depending on the

settings of “Select display type field”.

Clock font color 5

Set the font color of the clock display.

1: Actually, the name of the selected item is displayed.

2: Not displayed when you select “Clock theme” by “Select type

field”.

3: You can change the displayed city name also by “World time”

>P187

4: Not displayed when you select “Do not show”/“Calendar +

Clock” by “Select display type field”.

5: Displayed only when you select “Calendar + clock” or “Digital

4” of “Clock” by “Select display type field”.

Information

• If you press M[View], you can confirm the display set.

Setting the Display for Incoming Calls

C](Display) ]12

You can set the image displayed when you receive an

incoming call.

Setting items/Setting at purchase >P246

1. From the Display Menu (P75), “Main display” ]

“Incoming call”

•

Select from the images saved on “My picture” of “Data

box”.

P166

Setting Display for Outgoing Calls

C](Display) ]13

You can set the image displayed when you make a call.

Setting items/Setting at purchase >P246

1. From the Display Menu ]“Main display” ]

“Outgoing call” (P75)

•

Select from the images saved on “My picture” of “Data

box”.

P166

Sound/Display

Setting Sub Display

You can set images of the stand-by display for Sub

display and displays for incoming and outgoing calls. You

can set the maximum of the image size of 1280 x 1024,

the file size of JPEG file to 700K bytes and the file size of

GIF file to 500K bytes on the stand-by display. Some

images cannot be set properly.

• When the image saved in stand-by mode, making and

receiving a call at purchase, see “Pre-installed data at

purchase” (P260)

Setting Stand-by Display

C](Display) ]21

You can set wallpapers and clock displays on the Stand-

by display.

Setting items/Setting at purchase >P246, P247

1. From the Display Menu (P75), “Sub display” ]

“Stand-by display” ]Select from the following

setting items ]After setting, I[Done]

Wallpaper

–Select type field 1

• Select file ... Select an image saved in “My picture”

of “Data box” from “Select file/Clock theme field”.

• Clock theme ... Select a clock theme from “Select

file/Clock theme field”.

–Select file/Clock theme field 1:Select an image

(P166) or a clock theme saved in “My picture” of

“Data box”.

• The selectable items may differ depending on the

settings of "Select type field".

Display items 2

You can set the display format for the clock.

1: Actually, the name of the selected item is displayed.

2: Does not appear when a wallpaper is set as stand-by theme.

Information

• You can view the screen after setting by pressing M[View].

Setting Display for Incoming Calls

C](Display) ]22

You can set the image to be displayed when you receive a

call.

Setting items/Setting at purchase >P247

1. From Display Menu (P75), “Sub display” ]

“Incoming call”

•

Select from the images saved on “My picture” of “Data

box”.

P166

Sound/Display

Setting the Display for Outgoing Calls

C](Display) ]23

You can change the image to be displayed when you

make a call.

Setting items/Setting at purchase >P247

1. From Display Menu (P75), “Sub display” ]

“Outgoing call”

•

Select from the images saved on “My picture” of “Data

box”.

P166

Setting Fonts of Dial Characters

C](Display) ]3

You can set the sizes and colors of the dial fonts

displayed when you make a call, etc.

Setting items/Setting at purchase >P247

1. From the Display Menu (P75), “Font” ]Select from

the following setting items ]After setting,

I[Done].

Dial font size

Select a size of dial fonts.

Dial font color

Select a color of dial fonts.

Setting Menu Style

C](Display) ]4

You can set the style of the Menu Style that appears when

pressing C[Menu] on the Stand-by display.

Setting items/Setting at purchase >P247

1. From the Display Menu (P75), “Menu style” ]

“Grid”/“List” ]I[Done]

Setting Backlight

C](Display) ]5

You can set the lighting duration of the Main screen, Sub

display or buttons.

Setting items/Setting at purchase >P247

1. From the Display Menu (P75), “Backlight” ]Select

from the following setting items ]After setting,

I[Done].

Main display

Set the lighting duration and brightness of the Main

screen.

Sub display

Set the lighting duration and brightness of the Sub

display.

Keypad

Set the lighting duration of the buttons.

Sound/Display

Setting color Scheme

C](Display) ]6

You can set the color scheme of the Main screen.

Setting items/Setting at purchase >P247

1. From the Display Menu (P75), “Color scheme” ]

Select the color scheme you want to set ]I

[Done].

Information

• If you press C[View], you can view the screen after setting.

Setting LED

C](Display) ]7

Set lighting for incoming voice calls, etc.

Setting items/Setting at purchase >P247, P248

1. From Display menu (P75), “Lighting LED” ]Select

next item to be set ]I[Done]

Lighting

Set whether to set lighting.

Incoming voice call

Set lighting pattern and color used for incoming voice

calls.

Incoming video call

Set lighting pattern and color used for incoming video-

phone calls.

Receiving mail

Set lighting pattern and color used for incoming mail.

Receiving message R

Set lighting pattern and color used for incoming

MessageR.

Receiving message F

Set lighting pattern and color used for incoming

MessageF.

Receiving SMS

Set lighting pattern and color used for incoming SMS.

Playing music

Set lighting pattern and color used when playing

music.

Alarm

Set lighting pattern and color used for alarm.

Schedule

Set lighting pattern and color used for scheduled

alarm.

During call

Set lighting pattern and color used during talking over

a call.

Call/Answer ............................................86

Call Feature ............................................91

Video-Phone...........................................93

Date & Time ............................................95

Network (for overseas use) ....................96

Changing a Host from i-mode ...............98

Security...................................................99

.........................................101

Others Settings.....................................101

Settings

On the Stand-by display, C[Menu] ]

(Settings) or “Settings”

To display the Settings menu

Settings

Call/Answer

Checking Call/Mail History

Displaying Received Call Records

C](Settings) ]111

You can view the record of received call.

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Call/Answer” ]

“Call/Mail history” ] “Received calls”

•A/T: You can make a call to the other party of

the record being selected.

•I[Delete]: You can delete the record being selected.

2. Select a call record ]C

•A/T: You can make a call to the other party in a

list.

•I[Delete]: You can delete the list of call record.

•J: You can view the call record.

Using the Submenu of the Received Calls screen/

Details screen

1. From the Received Calls screen (See left)/Detail

screen (See above), M[Menu] ] Select from the

following submenu items

You can view details of the call record selected.

When you select “Missed call

history”, “Ringing time” is displayed.

This list will be displayed when the

phone number in a list are registered

in phonebook list. You can view the

list by pressing J.

Settings

Icon Description

Received voice calls

Received video-phone calls

Rejected calls

Missed calls (Voice calls)

Missed calls (Video-phone calls)

Settings

Add to phonebook 2

history newly/additionally to a phonebook. Go to step

2 (P64) in ”Adding to phonebook”.

Send mail 3

Create i-mode mail with a destination set to a mail

address saved in phonebook. Go to step 3 (P149) of

“Composing i-mode mail message”.

Delete

You can delete the call record selected/displayed.

Delete all 1

You can delete all the call records.

Go to list 4

You can return to the screen of received call list (P86).

1: Not displayed in submenu of detail screen.

2: Not displayed if information on the caller of the call record

selected is stored in the phonebook.

3: When you compose a mail on the Received Calls screen, the

phone number or the mail address that the cursor is placed on

at the bottom of the screen will be entered as the destination.

When you compose a mail on the Detail screen, the mail

address which is saved in the phonebook will be entered as

the destination. However, when no mail address is registered,

phone number is entered as the destination.

4: Displayed in submenu of detail screen.

Displaying Dialed Call Records

C](Settings) ]112

You can view dialed call records.

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Call/Answer” ]

“Call/Mail history” ] “Dialed calls”

• The Dialed Call Records appears.

2. Select a history ]C

• The Detail screen appears.

Information

• See “Using the Submenu of Received Calls Screen”/“Using

the Submenu of the Detailed Screen” (P86) for the display

operation method and the submenus available from the Dialed

call records/Detail screen.

• “Dialed calls” appears as the Redial screen when you press

Ron the stand-by screen.

Displaying All Call Records

C](Settings) ]113

Received and dialed call records are displayed together.

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Call/Answer” ]

“Call/Mail history” ] “All calls”

• The All calls screen appears.

Mark Description

Dialed voice calls

Dialed video-phone calls

Settings

2. Select a history ]C

• The Detail screen appears.

Information

• See “Using the Submenu of Received Call Records

Screen” / “Using the Submenu of the Detailed Screen”

(P86) for the display operation method and the submenus

available from the All Calls screen / Detail screen.

Displaying received mail history

C](Settings) ]114

Display history of received mail.

1. From Settings menu (P85), select “Call/Answer” ]

“Call/Mail history” ] “Recv. mails”

• A history of the received mail appears.

2. Select a history ]C

• Detail screen appears.

Information

• See “Using the Submenu of Received mail history Screen”

/ “Using the Submenu of the Detailed Screen” (P86) for the

display operation method and the submenus available

from the All Calls screen / Detail screen.

Displaying sent mail history

C](Settings) ]115

Display history of sent mail.

1. From Settings menu (P85), select “Call/Answer” ]

“Call/Mail history” ] “Sent mails”

• A history of sent mail appears.

2. Select a history ]C

• Detail screen appears.

Information

• See “Using the Submenu of Received Call Records

Screen” / “Using the Submenu of the Detailed Screen”

(P86) for the display operation method and the submenus

available from the All Calls screen / Detail screen.

Displaying all mail history

C](Settings) ]116

Display history of all sent/received mail collectively.

1. From Settings menu (P85), select “Call/Answer” ]

“Call/Mail history” ] “All mails”

• A history of all mail appears.

2. Select a history ]C

• Detail screen appears.

Information

• See “Using the Submenu of Received mail history Screen”

/ “Using the Submenu of the Detailed Screen” (P86) for the

display operation method and the submenus available

from the All Calls screen / Detail screen.

Settings

Displaying Call Time

C](Settings) ]12

You can confirm call duration for each call type. You can

confirm the following items:

• The displayed call duration is a standard. The real of call

duration may differ.

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Call/Answer” ]

“Call duration”

• Call duration display appears.

Last call

You can confirm the last call duration.

Received calls

You can confirm the received call duration.

Dialed calls

You can confirm the dialed call duration.

All calls

You can confirm the total call duration.

Information

• If the display of call time exceeds “9999999:59:59”, the

setting will be reset to “000000:00:00”.

Resetting call duration

1. Select a call duration you want to clear on the Call

duration screen ]I[Reset] ]Enter your

terminal security code ]C]“Yes”

• To clear all the call durations ]M[Menu] ] “Reset

all”

Setting Earphone/Microphone Auto Answer

C](Settings) ]13

You can set how to answer an incoming call with the Flat-

plug Earphone/Microphone Set with Switch (option)

connected.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P249

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Call/Answer” ]

“Auto answer” ] Select from the following setting

items ]After setting, I[Done]

Auto answering

You can set the earphone/microphone auto answer to

ON/OFF.

Delayed time (SEC) (0-120)

You can set the time between receiving call and

answering a call automatically.

Information

• During a phone number display, you can make a call by

pressing the switch.

• While receiving a call, you can connect it by pressing the switch.

• During talking over a call, you can end the call by pressing the

switch for 1 or more seconds.

• If you press the switch for 1 or more seconds while receiving a

call, the call will be rejected.

Settings

Setting to Reject/Accept Incoming Calls

C](Settings) ]14

You can set whether to reject incoming calls.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P249

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Call/Answer” ]

“Reject/Accept call” ] Enter your terminal

security code ]C

• The Reject/Accept call display appears.

2. Select from the following setting items

You can set whether to accept all incoming calls.

Reject on list

You can reject the incoming call from the specific

parties. You can set the rejecting action and the

party's phone number to reject a call by pressing I

[List] (See below).

Reject all calls

–Silent : You can disable the ringing tone for all

incoming calls.

–Disconnect call : You can reject all incoming calls.

Memory reject call

You can reject calls from parties not registered in

phonebook and those with no caller IDs.

Information

• Even when rejecting a call by “Reject on list”, “Reject all calls”,

or “Memory reject call”, the record will be remained.

Setting Reject call List

1. From the Reject/Accept call display (See left),

Select “Reject on list” ] I[List]

• The Reject on list will be displayed.

•M[Menu]: You can edit/delete the list set.

2. I[Add] ]Select from the following setting items

]After setting, I[Done]

Reject types

–Silent : Disables the ring tone when receiving the

call from the other party set to “Reject number”.

–Disconnect call : Rejects incoming calls when

receiving the call from the other party set to “Reject

number”.

Reject number

Enter the phone number of a caller you want to reject.

You can select a phone number from the phonebook

by pressing C[Search] .

: If you use M[Menu] >Edit from “Reject on list”, you cannot use

this function.

Mark Description

The type of reject call is set to “Silent”.

The type of reject call is set to “Disconnect call”.

Settings

Setting an Answer Mode

C](Settings) ]15

You can set whether to answer a voice call by pressing a

button other thanA

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P249

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Call/Answer” ]

”Answer mode” ]Select from the following

setting items

Press send key

You can answer a call by pressing Aonly.

Open flip

You can answer a call by opening the FOMA phone. If

the FOMA phone is already open, you can answer a

call by pressing A.

Press any key

You can answer a call by pressing any key except for

M,I,FE,G.

Information

• This setting is not available for video phone call.

Call Feature

Setting the Reconnect Control

C](Settings) ]21

You can set whether to make an alarm sound to inform

you when you are reconnected immediately after

disconnected owing to bad radio wave conditions.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P249

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Call feature” ]

”Reconnect alarm” ]Select from the following

setting items

High alarm

Set high alarm sounds.

Low alarm

Set Low alarm sounds.

No alarm

No sound.

Information

• The time to reconnect the network may differ depending on

the status of phone or radio (the maximum 10 seconds).

• The duration to reconnect the network can be chargeable.

• Depending on the status of phone or radio, the alarm may not

sound, and the call may be disconnected.

Settings

Setting Quality Alarm

C](Settings) ]22

You can set whether to make an alarm sound to inform

you when a call is liable to be disconnected midway

because of bad radio wave conditions.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P250

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Call feature” ]

“Quality alarm” ]Select from the following

setting items

High alarm

Set high alarm sounds.

Low alarm

Set low alarm sounds.

No alarm

No sounds.

Setting Minute Reminder

C](Settings) ]23

You can check the call duration by beep sound every

minute during a voice call (Not support this function for

Video-phone call).

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P249

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Call feature” ]

“Minute reminder” ]“ON”/“OFF”

Information

• This setting is not available with a video-phone call.

Setting Prefix Dial

C](Settings) ]24

You can store prefix numbers such as international access

code or “184 / 186” and add it to the beginning of the

phone number to dial.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P249

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Call feature” ]

“Prefix dial”

• The Prefix Dial screen appears.

2. Select a PREFIX field to enter ]Enter a number ]

I[Done]

Setting International Dial

Setting Auto assist

C](Settings) ]251

You can set whether to automatically replace “+´” at the

beginning of a phone number with an international access

code such as “009130010” for making an international call.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P249

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Call feature” ]

“International dial” ]“Auto assist setting” ]

“Auto”/“OFF”

Settings

Setting IDD prefix

C](Settings) ]252

You can set the international access code to be added to

the beginning of a phone number for making an

international call.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P249

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Call feature” ]

“International dial” ]“IDD prefix setting” ]Select

from the following setting items ]After setting,

I[Done]

IDD prefix name

Enter the name of an international call service.

IDD prefix code

Enter an international access code.

Setting Close setting

C](Settings) ]26

You can set how the FOMA phone works when it is

folded.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P249

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Call feature” ]

“Close setting” ]Select from the following setting

items

End the call

The call is disconnected.

Continue(Mute)

Put the call on mute without emitting Continue (Mute)

holding sound. In this case, your voice is not heard to

the other party.

Information

• During video-phone call, if you close the flip, the call will be

disconnected regardless of this setting.

Video-Phone

You can change settings for the video-phone operation

and display.

Changing the Video-Phone Settings

C](Settings) ]31

You can set how the FOMA phone works and screens

when making a video-phone call.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P250

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Video-phone” ]

“Video-phone settings” ]Select from the

following setting items ]After setting, I[Done]

VoiceCall AutoSwitch

Sets whether to redial by automatically switching to a

voice call if the other party is unable to answer a

video-phone call.

Settings

Display setting

You can set how to display the Talking screen.

–Both : Your image and the other party’s image are

displayed.

–Other : Only the other party’s image is displayed.

–Me : Only your image is displayed.

Sub screen

You can set an image to be displayed on the sub

screen when “Display setting for video phone call” is

set to “Both”.

–Me : Your image is displayed on sub screen and the

other party's image is displayed on main screen.

–Other : The other party’s image is displayed on sub

screen and your image is displayed on main screen.

Send camera image

You can set whether to send your image to the other

party. If set to “OFF”, a substitutive image is sent to

the other party.

Sending img. quality

–Prefer image quality : Sends images laying stress

on image quality. Prefer image quality is effective if

there is little motion.

–Normal : Sends images in standard quality and

motion speed.

–Prefer motion quality : Sends images laying stress

on motion speed. Prefer motion speed is effective if

there is much motion.

Display light

–Always on : Keeps the display lit during a call.

–Terminal setting : Follows the settings of the “Main

display” of the “Backlight”. >P83

Hands-free V.phone

Set whether to enable handsfree function during

video-phone calls.

Selecting a Video-phone Image

Changing Substitutive images

C](Settings) ]321

You can set a substitutive image to send in place of your

own image during a video-phone call.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P250

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Video-phone” ]

“Image settings” ]“Substitutive image” ]Select

from the following setting items ]After setting,

I[Done]

Image

–Default Image : The image by default.

–Selected image : You can select an image other

than the default image from the “Image list”.

Image list

You can select an image for when “Image” is set to

“Selected image”. Select from images stored in “My

picture” of “Data box”. >P166

Settings

Changing Response Hold Image

C](Settings) ]322

You can set an image to display when you put the call on

hold during ringing of a video-phone call.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P250

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Video-phone” ]

”Image settings” ]”Response hold image”

• See “Changing Substitutive image” (P94) for the

subsequent operations.

Changing On-hold Images

C](Settings) ]323

You can set an image to display when you put the call on

hold.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P250

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Video phone” ]

“Image settings” ]“On-hold image”

• See “Changing Substitutive image” (P94) for the

subsequent operations.

Date & Time

Setting Time

C](Settings) ]41

You can set the time of city which is already set “Home”

(the city at purchase: Tokyo) by “World time” (P187).

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P250

1. From the Settings menu (P85), Select “Date &

Time” ]“Set time” ]Select from the following

setting items ]After setting, I[Done]

Set time

Press Jto select an input item (hour, minute,

second, am/pm ). Use the numeric keys to enter

numbers. Press Cto switch between am/pm .

Time format

You can set whether to display time in the 12-hour

format or in the 24-hour format.

Hour indication

You can set whether the alarm will sound or not after

setting (00 min). You can select the ring tone as an

alarm. If you do not want this indication, set to “OFF”.

: Displayed if “Time format” is set to “12-hour”.

Setting Date

C](Settings) ]42

You can set the date.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P250

Settings

1. From the Settings menu (P85) ]Select “Date &

Time” ]“Set date” ]Select from the following

setting items ]After setting, I[Done]

Set date

Press Jto select an input item (year, month, date).

Use the numeric keys to enter numbers.

Date format

You can change display formats of the date.

(DD/MM/YYYY, MM/DD/YYYY, YYYY/MM/DD)

: YYYY stands for Year, MM stands for Month, and DD stands for

Day.

Setting Daylight Saving

C](Settings) ]43

You can set daylight saving time.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P251

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Date & Time” ]

“Daylight saving” ]“ON”/“OFF”

Network (for overseas use)

Selecting the Network Connection Mode

Making settings for Network search

C](Settings) ]51

You can select a network setting method in case

destination networks (Communication carriers) change for

overseas use, etc.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P251

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Network” ]

“Network selection” ]Select from the following

setting items

Auto

Automatically searches for the network for setting.

Manual

The network search display appears, allowing you to

select a network from the list displayed after search.

Information

• It may take a few minutes to find the network.

• If you set “Auto”, you can search the network automatically in

the following situation.

– When you switch on – Out of the service area

• If you stop searching the network by “Manual”, the setting will

be changed to “Auto”.

Settings

Setting the Network Mode

C](Settings) ]52

You can set a type of network to search for when networks

are searched according to “Network selection”.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P251

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Network” ]

“Network mode” ]Select from the following

setting items

Auto

Searches all the networks connectable.

WCDMA only

Searches only networks supporting 3G.

GSM only

Searches only networks supporting GSM/GPRS.

Information

• You cannot exchange the data through packet service under

GSM network.

• When using the FOMA handset in Japan or in the service area

of 3G network, we recommend you change the setting of the

“Network mode” to “WCDMA only” to save battery power.

Registering a Network of Preferred list

C](Settings) ]53

Setting Networks

When you search the network automatically, you can add

a preferable network (communication carrier) to connect

to.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P251

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Network” ]

“Preferred lists”

• Networks registered in UIM are listed downward from

the one with the highest priority.

•I[Delete]: You can delete the network selected.

2. M[Menu] ]Select from the following setting

items

Add new

- Search network

You can select from the network list stored in the

FOMA phone for adding.

- Enter new network

You can enter the country code (MCC) and the

network code (MNC) for adding. After setting, press

I[Done].

Delete

You can delete the selected network.

Settings

Move up

You can move the selected network upward. The

network moved upward is more preferred.

Move down

You can move the selected network downward. The

network moved downward is less preferred.

: If you register multiple networks, you can use this menu.

Information

• If the network is not registered, [Menu], [Delete] of soft key

area on preferred list to register will not be displayed. To add

new network, press I[Add], select and register.

• The registered data is saved in UIM.

Displaying the Network Name

C](Settings) ]54

You can set whether to display the name of the network

currently set on the Stand-by display.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P251

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Network” ]

“Network name display” ]“Display on”/“Display

off”

Changing a Host from i-mode

Setting / Changing the Host

C](Settings) ]6

Normally, you do not need to change the setting.

You can set a host to use services of various providers

other than i-mode. If the host is changed, i-mode

becomes unavailable.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P251

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Host selection” ]

From the Host selection screen, I[Add] ]Enter

your terminal security code ]C]Set the

following items ]After setting, I[Done]

• The host set is displayed on the Host selection

screen with attached to it.

Host name

Enter the name displayed on the Host selection

screen.

Host address

Enter the address of the host.

Access point

Enter the Access point (URL, etc.).

Settings

Information

• To switch the host back to “i-Mode” or to switch to another

host, select “i-Mode”/other hosts and press Con the Host

selection screen.

• If you press M[Menu] on the Host selection screen, you can

edit / delete / display the host set. Note that you cannot edit /

delete pre-installed “i-Mode”.

• In Access point menu, you should enter IP address in PDP

type.

Security

Setting All Lock

C](Settings) ]71

You can set whether to lock requiring to enter the terminal

security code to operate function. During All Lock, “All

lock” is displayed on the Stand-by display.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P251

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Security” ]“All

lock” ]Select from the following setting items

Power on

You can set whether to lock the FOMA phone when

you turn of the power. You need to enter your terminal

security code to set it.

Immediate

Sets All lock immediately. You need to enter your

terminal security code to set it.

none

You can release All lock. You need to enter your

terminal security code to release it.

Information

• While “All lock” is set, even though you receive an SMS, it is

only saved, and it is received after you release “All lock”.

• While “All lock” is set, you cannot perform packet transmission

connecting a personal computer.

• While “All lock” is set, answering operation is not performed

even though you receive a call, and only busy tone is played. It

is displayed as a missed call after you release “All lock”.

• While “All lock” is set, you can receive mails and messageR/F.

However, the screen of receiving messageR/F or receiving

result of the message will not appear, and only the icon

appears.

• While “All lock” is set, the alarm tone does not sound, and

only the icon appears. The alarm tone sounds after you

release “All lock”.

Releasing All Lock

1. Press one of 1~0]Enter your terminal

security code ]C

• Pressing I[Emergency Call] key on the “lock” screen:

Emergency calls (110/118/119) can be made.

100

Settings

Display may differ depending on the used UIM.

• If you enter a wrong terminal security code 5 times in a

row, the handset turns off automatically. When you turn

on the power again, you can enter the terminal security

code.

Setting PIN Code Request

C](Settings) ]72

You can set to enter PIN1 code every time you turn on the

power to the FOMA phone.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P251

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Security” ]“PIN

code request” ]“ON”/“OFF” ]Enter PIN1 code ]

Changing Your Password

Changing the PIN1 code / PIN2 code

C](Settings) ]731 /

C](Settings) ]732

You can change the PIN1 code / PIN2 code. To change

the PIN1 code, you need to set “PIN code request” to

“ON” beforehand. The code is set to “0000” at purchase,

but you can change to any number as desired.

• In case you purchase a new FOMA phone and start

using it inserting the UIM you have been using, use the

PIN1 code / PIN2 code you have set.

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Security” ]

“Change password” ]“PIN1 code”/“PIN2 code”

2. Enter the current PIN1 code/PIN2 code ]C

3. Enter a new PIN1 code/PIN2 code ]C

4. Enter the same code that you did in Step 3 again ]

Information

• If you enter a wrong PIN code over 3 times, the PIN code will

be locked automatically. If you unlock the PIN code, see

“Releasing PIN lock code” (P105).

Current PIN1 code. R:3

New PIN1 code

Verify PIN1 code

Change PIN1 code

The remaining time to enter

PIN is available

101

Settings

Changing Your Terminal Security Code

C](Settings) ]733

You can change your terminal security code.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P251

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Security” ]

“Change password” ]“Security code”

• For the subsequent steps, just like the steps to change

the PIN1 code / PIN2 code, enter your current terminal

security code, enter a new terminal security code and

then enter the same code again for confirmation.

C](Settings) ]8

You can switch the languages of the FOMA phone

between Japanese and English.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P251

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “ ”]

“”/“English”

Information

• This setting is registered in FOMA phone and UIM which is

currently inserted. If you insert other UIM which registered

other settings, the settings of this UIM will be preferred.

Others Settings

Checking the Memory Status

C](Settings) ]91

You can check the usage status and available space of the

memories of the handset of the FOMA phone.

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Others” ]“Memory

status” ]Select from the following items

Data box

You can check the empty or the reserved capacity

(Approximate) of the Data box for data such as My

picture, i-motion or Melody are stored.

Personal info.

You can check the empty or the reserved capacity

(Approximate) of the memory for Personal info. for data

such as Phonebook, Schedule, Memo or Date Counter.

UIM memory

You can check the empty or the reseved capacity

(Approximate) of the memory for data such as

“Phonebook” or “SMS”.

Resetting the Settings

Clearing the Memory

C](Settings) ]921

You can clear all the data recorded in the FOMA phone.

102

Settings

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Others” ]“Reset

settings” ]“Clear memory” ]Select from the

following items

• You need to enter your terminal security code for

deleting.

Data box

Clears all the data saved in the Data box folder of the

FOMA phone.

Personal info.

Clears all the personal data saved in the FOMA phone

such as phonebooks, schedule, call history and so on.

Initializing the Default Settings

C](Settings) ]922

You can reset to all settings at purchase except for

“i-mode setting” and “Mail setting”.

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Others” ]“Reset

settings” ]Default settings ]“Yes” ]Enter the

terminal security code ]Press C

Information

• When the date and time are reset, display or play of i-motion

and files with valid period and/or expiration date set may be

disabled.

Changing the Settings for the SMS Center

C](Settings) ]93

Normally, you do not need to change the settings.

You can change the SMS centers to use.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P252

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Others” ]“SMS

center” ]“Select from the following setting items

]After setting, I[Done]

SMSC

–DoCoMo : You can use the DoCoMo SMS center.

–Others : You can use another company’s SMS

center.

Address

If “SMSC” is set to “Others”, enter the address of the

SMS center.

Resetting the holiday

C](Settings) ]94

You can reset all settings of holiday of FOMA phone to

settings at purchase.

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Others” ]“Reset

holiday” ]“Yes”

103

Passwords ............................................104

Preventing the Phone from

Activating the Operation of Function ..105

Other Safety Settings...........................106

Safety settings

Passwords

For some functions of the FOMA, you need to enter

your password. In addition to the Terminal security

Code for operating respective mobile phone functions,

the Network Security Code to use network services,

and i-mode password are available. These passwords

help you utilize your FOMA phone.

Information for Passwords

• Do not use easily-perceived figures such as “Birthday”,

“the part of phone number”, “Area code or Room

number”, “1111”, “1234” to prevent it from being

guessed by others. Note that you make a memo of the

password you set.

• Make sure that prevent the password from being

known by others. If the password is known by third

party, NTT DoCoMo will not have any other

responsibility concerning the mischief or the misuse of

handset.

• There is no requesting the client's password from NTT

DoCoMo.

• Note that if you do not remember password, you need

to bring an identification card such as a driver's

license, FOMA handset, UIM to a handling counter

such as a DoCoMo shop. For details, consult

“DoCoMo Information Center” described on the back

of this manual.

Terminal security code

The terminal security code is set “0000” at purchase. You

can change the terminal security code. To change the

code, see “Changing Your Terminal Security Code” (P100).

Network security code

The Network Security Code is a 4-digit number required for

using various network services and for various procedures at

the “ e” (DoCoMo e-site). The Network

Password is determined at the time of contract and can be

changed by the user.

The user who has an ID and a password of “My DoCoMo” ,

the integrated support site for PC, can change the network

security code through PC.

And, the user can change various procedures of DoCoMo e-

site in i-mode.

For “My DoCoMo”, “DoCoMo e-site”, see the back of this

manual.

i-mode Password

The i-mode password is a 4-digit password required for

registering, deleting My-menu, Messaging service, applying

for or canceling an i-mode service (charged) (The service

provider may supply its own password).

The default for i-mode password is “0000”, but you can

change it. If you change the password from i-mode, see

“Changing” (P136).

104

Safety settings

105

Safety settings

PIN1 code/PIN2 code

For the UIM, you can set the 2 security codes, namely the

PIN1 code / PIN2 code. The default for these security

codes are “0000”, but you can change these codes as

you like. To change the codes, see “Setting PIN Code

Request” (P100), “Changing the PIN1 code / PIN2 code”

(P100).

aPIN1 Code

The PIN1 code is the 4-to 8-digit code for checking the

user each time the UIM is inserted into the FOMA phone

or each time the FOMA phone is turned on so that you

can prevent the third party from using your UIM. If you

enter PIN1 code, you can receive or make a call or

activate the operation.

aPIN2 Code

The PIN2 code is the 4-to 8-digit code for using the user

certificate or applying for the issue of it and performing

reset All Calls.

This FOMA phone does not have this function.

Information

• If you purchase a new FOMA phone and use the existing UIM

with new FOMA phone, use PIN1 code and PIN2 code you

have set previously.

• If you enter a wrong PIN1 code / PIN2 code 3 times in a row

on the display requiring its entry, the PIN1 code / PIN2 code is

locked automatically. To unlock the code, you need to enter

PIN lock release code.

Releasing PIN lock code

PIN lock releasing code is a 8-digit password to release

locking PIN1 code / PIN2 code. You cannot change it.

Information

• If you enter a wrong “PIN unlock code” 10 times in a row, it is

automatically locked. In this case, you need to bring the FOMA

phone, UIM and an identification card such as a driver's license

to a handling counter such as a DoCoMo shop.

Preventing the Phone from Activating

the Operation of Function

To protect the information or data in FOMA phone, you

can activate the security function to prevent from

activating the operation or the function.

Setting All Lock

After locking FOMA phone, you need to enter terminal

password to activate the phone. To set this function, see

“Setting All Lock” (P99).

106

Safety settings

Setting not to display mail without

permission

You can set the security function for the Inbox, Outbox,

and Unsent of the Mail menu. For setting this function, see

“Display” of “Mail setting” (P156).

Other Safety Settings

The FOMA phone has the following safety settings in

addition to the “Security” function:

Safety settings

Purpose Function/Service

To change the mail

address

Receive/reject only mail

between i-mode

terminals

Receive/reject mail

from specified domains

Receive/reject mail

from specified

addresses

To reject 200th and

succeeding i-mode

messages sent from a

single i-mode phone on

the same day

To reject unsolicited Ad

mail

To reject SMS

reception

To store/check safety

information when a

disaster occurs

To stop the mail

function temporarily

To check the settings

for the mail function

Change mail address

Measures for nuisance

mail (reception/rejection

setting) Receive from

specified domain

Selected Mail Senders

Reject unsolicited Ad

mail/Reject mail

Set/Confirm SMS

Rejection Settings

i-mode Disaster

Message Board Service

Suspend Mail

Stop the mail function

Confirm Settings

Reference

Refer to

“Mobile

Phone

User's

Guide

[i-mode]”

Purpose Function/Service

To reject calls from

specified callers

To receive calls from callers

registered in the phonebook

Not to take nuisance

calls

Not to take calls from

callers not notifying caller ID

To receive necessary

mail only

Reject/Accept call

Memory reject call

Nuisance call barring

Caller ID request

Receive option

Reference

P90

P202

P203

P154

107

Notes for using the camera .......................108

Using the Camera ......................................109

Shooting Still Images .................................109

Shooting Moving Images...........................115

Setting Camera...........................................118

Multimedia (Camera)

1 Camera-mode

2 Movie-mode

3 Camera settings

Select

Multimedia

On the Stand-by display, C[Menu] ]

(Multimedia) or “Multimedia”

To display the Multimedia menu

Select

Multimedia

108

Multimedia (Camera)

Notes for using the camera

• If the lens is stained with finger prints or something oily,

you cannot shoot clear images. Clean the lens with a

soft cloth before shooting images.

• If the lens is exposed to direct sunlight for a long time,

the color filter inside and images may be discolored.

• If shooting or saving images after leaving the FOMA

phone in a warm place for a long time, image quality

may deteriorate.

• Do not cover the lens with fingers, etc. when shooting

images.

• When the battery level is low, you may not be able to

activate camera and movie mode.

• When shooting a fast moving subject, it may be

recorded a little off the displayed position or the image

may be blurred.

• Be careful not to move your hands when taking a shot.

Hold the FOMA phone securely with your hands so that

it does not move, or place the FOMA phone in a stable

place and use the self timer when taking a shot.

• When moving your hands when shooting a moving

image or when shooting a rapidly moving image, the

image may be blurred.

• When trying to directly shoot a strong illuminant such

as the sun or a lamp, the image may become dim or

blurred.

• The camera has been made with highly precise

technologies, but there may be points or lines that

always look bright as well as pixels and lines that

always look dim. Also, be aware that when shooting an

image in a place where light intensity is small, it looks a

little rough or noises such as white lines increase.

• If the battery becomes low level before saving images,

you are not able to save still or moving shot images.

• Since the camera consumes electric power quickly, do

not operate the camera or leave it for a long time.

• It may take a long time until images are displayed on

the shooting display after starting the camera

depending on the settings.

• Images shot by the camera may differ from actual

subjects in color tone and brightness.

• To prevent from taking a picture without permission,

the shutter tone sound even on manner mode. Also,

even when the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone Set

with Switch (option) is attached to the FOMA phone,

the shutter tone sound from the speaker.

Multimedia (Camera)

109

Multimedia (Camera)

Copyrights and Rights of Portrait

You have no right to copy, modify, or distribute the

contents of which a third party holds the copyright such

as text, images, music, or software downloaded from web

pages on the Internet, or images shot by the cameras of

this product without permission from the copyright holder

except for when the copy or quote is for personal use that

is allowed by the Copyright Law. Note that it may be

prohibited to shoot or record live performances or

exhibitions even for personal use. Make sure that you

refrain from taking portraits of other persons and

distributing such portraits over the Internet without

consent, as this violates portrait rights.

Using the Camera

You can adjust the angle of the camera on setting the

scene of a person, an landscape or a portrait.

Information

• If you shoot an image by adjusting the lens within the FOMA

phone as shown above, the image is saved as mirror image.

Shooting Still Images

C](Multimedia) ]1

Still images can be shot. The still images you take are

saved to “Camera” folder or its sub folders of “My picture”

in “Data box” of the FOMA phone. A saving folder can be

set from “Auto Saving” (P118).

Please respect the privacy of individuals around you when

taking and sending photos using camera-equipped

mobile phones.

110

Multimedia (Camera)

1. In Stand-by mode, press G

•H/FE: You can set the magnification of the image.

•J: You can change the brightness of the image.

•I

[Album]: You can view the “Camera” folder of “My

picture”.

•T

: Flip the image vertically.

2. After confirming the subject, C

•I

[Mail]: You can compose the message with

attaching the image. Go to step 2 on page 149 of

“Composing i-mode mail”.

•C

[OK]: Return to the Still Image Finder Stand-by

screen.

•M

[Menu]: You can perform the operations such as

deleting the picture in submenu. >P113

•Q

: Return to Still Image Finder Stand-by screen

without saving the shot image.

aWhen ”Auto Saving” is set to OFF

Press C[Save] immediately after shooting an image

and go to the next step. When not saving the shot

image, press I[Cancel]. For “Auto Saving”

P118

•I[Save]: After deciding the folder to save the image,

the finishing screen of shooting still image is displayed.

•C[Open]: Opens a selected folder.

•M[Menu]: A submenu opens.

P114

Files

File

Files

File

Camera

Data transfer

Item

Pre-installed

My picture

Menu SwitchOpen

Menu MailOK

SavedSaved

Menu AlbumRec.

111

Multimedia (Camera)

After taking a multishot

After setting a multishot (P112) and taking multiple images,

you can view the display as below.

•C[View

]

: You can view the selected file using zooming.

•I

[Mail]: You can compose i-mode mail with attaching the

selected file. Go to step 2 on page 149 of “Composing

i-mode Mail”.

•Q: Returns to Still Image Finder Stand-by screen to

take a picture.

Icons on the Still Image Finder Stand-by Screen

• Indicates the status of the still image shot setting.

1: The remaining number of shots varies depending on the

settings of shooting.

2 : The selected value is displayed.

If “Size” is set to “128X96” and “Quality” is set to “Normal”,

the savable number of still images is approx. 8000.

Camera [1/3]

MailMenu View The file size of selected one

DescriptionIcon

Camera mode (Still image shot mode)

169 2Remaining number of shots

Auto timer

Size

Zoom

Brightness

Multishot

No restriction

100KB

File size

restriction

9KB

Super fine

Fine

Storage

image

quality

setup Normal

112

Multimedia (Camera)

Using the Submenus of the Still Image

Finder Stand-by Screen

You can set up functions to shoot still images.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P254

1. From the Still Image Finder Stand-by screen (P110),

M[Menu] ]Select from the following submenu

items using

]Select a setting item ]C]I

[Close]

Rotate

Set to rotate the view.

You can rotate the view also by pressing Ton Still

Image Finder Stand-by screen.

Size

You can set the photo size.

Quality

You can set the image quality to store shots of still

images.

Multishot

You can set the number of continuous shots of still

images to be taken by pushing the shutter.

Zoom

You can set the magnification of the image.

Brightness

You can set brightness (exposure) of the image.

White balance

You can revise the color tone for the image. This

setting is for a shot image with an unnatural color

tone.

Night mode

This setting is for when taking a shot in a dark place,

etc.

Frame shot

This setting is for when taking a shot with a frame

attached to the subject. Select “Choose Frame” and

select a frame using J>Press C.

Auto timer

You can set Auto timer. Select the number of seconds

between pressing the shutter and taking a shot.

Effect

This setting is for when taking a shot with special

effect applied to the image.

Size restriction

You can restrict the size of still images to store.

Information

• If taking a shot with the “size” set to “1280x1024”, you cannot

use the zoom.

• If “Multishot” is set, still images are automatically saved even if

“Auto Saving” is set to OFF.

• If “Multishot” is set, the “Size” automatically changes to

“320x240”. After setting Multishot, you cannot change the size.

113

Multimedia (Camera)

• If the “Frame shot” is set, the “size” automatically changes to

“176x220”. After setting the Frame shot, you cannot change

the “size”.

• You cannot set “Multishot” and “Frame shot” at the same

time.

• If you are unable to store images in the size set in “File size

restriction”, automatically lower the resolution to store images.

• If you set “File size restriction” to “9KB”,

- You cannot set “Quality”.

- You can set “Size” only to “128 x 96” or “176 x 144”.

• If you set “File size restriction” to “100KB”,

- You cannot set “Quality”.

- You cannot set “Size” to “1280 x 1024”.

• For the frame image stored by default, see “Frame” (P250) in

“Data stored by default”.

Using the submenus of the Still Image

Shooting End Screen

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P255

1. From the Still Image Shooting End screen (P110) /

Multishot Shooting End Screen (P111), M[Menu]

]Select from the following submenu items

New picture

Returns to Still Image Shooting screen.

Mark/Unmark

You can delete the file shot by multishot. After selecting a

file, press M[Menu] >“Delete”.

–Mark : You can mark a file at a time.

–Mark all : You can mark all the files collectively.

–Unmark : You can unmark the file marked by

“Mark” or one of the files marked by “Mark all” at a

time.

–Unmark all : You can unmark the file marked by

“Mark” or all the files marked by “Mark all”.

Send via mail

You can attach shots of still images to i-mode mail for

sending. Go to step 2 (P149) of “Composing i-mode

mail message”.

Delete (Selected shot )

You can delete a shot of a still image.

Set as wallpaper

Set as wallpaper for “Main display” or “Sub display”.

114

Multimedia (Camera)

Slide show

–Go : You can display still images shot in Multishot in

order.

–Settings : You can set up “View as” and “Time

interval (secs)” for slide show. After setting, press

I[Done].

Make animated GIF

You can select multiple files to create animation. After

selecting files, press I[Make].

Sort by

You can sort files.

View by

You can change file display methods.

File property

You can display the name, size and type of the file

being selected.

: Displayed only after taking images in Multishot.

Using submenu on still image saving screen

Setting items/Setting at purchase >P258

1. Press M[Menu] on still image saving screen

(P110) ]Select the next submenu item

Open

Open a selected folder.

Save to current folder

After deciding the current folder as the folder to save the

image, the finishing screen of shooting still image is

displayed.

New folder

Create a folder.

Delete

Delete a selected folder.

Sort by

Sort folders.

View by

Change the folder display method.

Memory info.

Display states, etc. of storage area in phone memory,

etc.

Folder property

Display the name, size, number of included files and

other information of a selected folder.

: Unavailable for folders set at purchase.

115

Multimedia (Camera)

Shooting Moving Images

C](Multimedia) ]2

Moving images can be shot. Shot moving images are

saved to “Camera” folder or its sub folders of “i-motion” in

“Data box” of the FOMA phone. A saving folder can be set

from “Auto Saving”. (P110)

1. From the Multimedia menu (P107), “Movie-mode”

< Moving Image Finder Stand-by>

•H/FE: You can change the magnification of the

images.

•J: You can change the brightness of the images.

•I

[Album]: You can view the folder of “Camera” in

“i-motion”.

•T

: Flip the image vertically.

You cannot flip the image vertically while shooting

moving image.

2. After confirming the subject, C

•H/FE: You can change the magnification of an

image.

•Q: If you press this key on recording, the moving

image is not saved, and return to Stand-by mode to

take a picture.

•C[Stop]: Press this key to end the camera and

return to the screen of step 3.

3. The shooting is ended.

OKMenu Mail

SavedSaved

Illuminates in red during shot.

Shot elapsed time/maximum shot time

Shot elapsed time is displayed with a bar.

Stop

Rec.Menu Album

116

Multimedia (Camera)

•I[Mail]: You can compose i-mode mail with

attaching the selected file. Go to step 2 on page 149

of “Composing i-mode mail”.

•C[OK]: Return to the Moving Image Finder Stand-by

screen.

•M[Menu]: You can delete the picture in submenu.

>P117

•Q: Return to Still Image Finder Stand-by screen

without saving the shot image.

aWhen “Auto Saving” is set to OFF

Press C[Save] immediately after shooting an image

and go to the next step. When not saving the shot

image, press I[Cancel]. For “Auto Saving”

P118

•I[Save]: After deciding the folder to save the image,

the finishing screen of shooting moving image is

displayed.

•C[Open]: Opens a selected folder.

•M[Menu]: A submenu opens.

P117

Icons on the Moving Image Finder Stand-by Screen

• Indicates the status of the moving image shot setting.

• See “Icons on the Still Image Finder Stand-by Screen”

(P111) for other icons.

: The recording time of a moving image can be set up to 30

minutes.

If “Quality” is set to “Super fine” and “Type” is set to

“Sound+Video", the preservation time of the recorded movie is

approx. 80 minutes.

The preservation time varies depending on the set shooting

condition.

Using the Submenu of the Moving Image

Finder Stand-by Screen

You can set up functions to shoot moving images.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P255

1. From the Moving Image Finder Stand-by screen

(P115), M[Menu] ]Select from the following

submenu items using J]Select a setting item ]

C]I[Close]

Files

File

Files

File

Camera

Data transfer

Item

Pre-installed

My picture

Menu SaveOpen

Description

Icon

Recording time (for Mail)

Sound+Video

Video only

Sound only

Movie type

Movie mode (Taking a moving image)

117

Multimedia (Camera)

Rotate

Set to shoot a rotated image.

You can rotate the view also by pressing

on Still

Image Finder Stand-by screen.

Quality

You can set the image quality to store shots of moving

images.

Zoom

You can set up the magnification of the images.

Brightness

You can set up brightness (exposure) of the images.

White balance

You can revise the color tone for the images. This setting

is for shot images with an unnatural color tone.

Night mode

This setting is for when shooting a shot in a dark

place, etc.

Effect

This setting is for when shooting a shot with special

effect applied to the image.

Recording time

You can set the recording time for moving images.

Type

You can set whether or not images / sound are

recorded when shooting moving images.

Information

• If “Recording time” is set to “Mail attach”, the recording time

varies depending on the “Quality” setting.

Using the Submenus of Moving Image

Shooting End Screen

1. From the Moving Image Shooting End screen

(P115), M[Menu] ]Select from the following

submenu items

New movie

The Finder screen returns.

Send via mail

You can attach shot moving images to i-mode mail for

sending. Go to step 2 (P149) of “Composing i-mode

mail message”.

Delete

You can delete shot moving images.

Using submenu on moving image saving screen

Setting items/Setting at purchase >P259

1. Press M[Menu] on moving image saving screen

(P116) ]Select one of the submenu items given

below

Open

Open a selected folder.

118

Multimedia (Camera)

Save to current folder

After deciding the current folder as the folder to save

the image, the finishing screen of shooting still image

is displayed.

New folder

Create a folder.

Delete

Delete a selected folder.

Sort by

Sort folders.

View by

Change the folder display method.

Memory info.

Display states, etc. of storage area in the phone

memory.

Folder property

Display the name, size, number of included files and

other information of a selected folder.

: Unavailable for folders set at purchase.

Setting Camera

C](Multimedia) ]3

Camera functions for shooting still and/or moving images

can be set.

1. Select “Camera settings” from Multimedia menu

(P107) ]Select one of the following items to be

set

Saving option

Set whether to automatically save shot still or moving

image. Use Jto set ON/OFF. When ON, set the

saving destination of still or moving image. After

setting, press I[Done].

Shutter sound

Set a sound to be emitted when the shutter is pressed.

• When an item is selected, a sample sound is emitted.

Flicker tuning

Set suppressing flickering of the screen.

Information

• Depending on the shooting environment and/or object tone,

flickering may not be completely suppressed by setting

“Flicker tuning”.

119

i-mode Menu ........................................120

What is i-mode? ...................................120

Displaying the iMenu display...............120

Displaying Sites from Bookmark .........121

Displaying Screen memo .....................122

Displaying Last URL.............................123

Displaying Internet Web Pages ...........123

Displaying MessageR/F .......................124

Checking Whether Center Holds

MessageR/F .........................................127

Setting Functions of i-mode ................127

Displaying Sites....................................130

How to See/Use Sites ..........................132

Using My Menu ....................................135

Changing i-mode Password ................136

i-mode

Select

On the Stand-by display, C[Menu] ]

(i-mode) or “i-mode”

To display the i-mode menu

Select

i-mode

120

i-mode

i-mode Menu

The i-mode menu is the basic display for viewing various

sites and Internet web pages. You can use each function of

i-mode from the i-mode menu.

What is i-mode?

i-mode is the online service that makes use of the display

of the i-mode phone to enable you to use convenient

information from i-mode sites (programs) and homepages

supporting i-mode and to exchange mail easily.

• Refer to “Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]” for

details.

• Not all the services described in “Mobile Phone User's

Guide [i-mode]” are supported. Check the description

of the models supporting each service with “Mobile

Phone User's Guide [i-mode]”.

Displaying the iMenu display

C](i-mode) ]1

You can access each i-mode site from iMenu.

1. From the i-mode menu (P119), “iMenu”

•

Refer to “

Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]

” for

items displayed on the iMenu display.

• See “Displaying Sites” (P130) for the subsequent

operations.

DescriptionMenu item

Connects to the i-mode Center

Displays your favorite sites and Internet

web pages.

Enter URL to connect to the internet.

Displays pages of sites, etc. saved in the

FOMA phone.

Displays the most recently accessed

site or Internet web page.

Bookmark

Last URL

Displays a list of the received

MessageR/F.

Message

You can set the FOMA functions related

to i-mode.

You can check whether the i-mode

Center holds mail and MessageR/F.

Check new

message

Go to

location

Screen memo

i-mode

setting

121

i-mode

Displaying Sites from Bookmark

C](i-mode) ]2

You can directly access your favorite sites from Bookmark.

• For the registration method, see “Using the Submenus

of the Site Screen” (P130).

1. From the i-mode menu (P119), “Bookmark”

2. Select a bookmark ]C

• Connected to the site.

Using the Submenus of the Bookmark List

Screen

1. From the Bookmark List screen (See above),

[Menu] ]Select from the following submenu

items

Connect

You can connect to the selected Bookmark site.

Edit bookmark

You can edit the title and URL of the selected

Bookmark. After editing, press I[Done].

Delete

You can delete the selected Bookmark.

Delete selected

You can select and delete multiple Bookmarks. After

selecting, M[Menu]>Select “Delete”

Delete all

You can delete all the registered Bookmarks. To delete

all, enter terminal security code >C[OK].

URL

You can display the URL of the selected Bookmark.

Copy URL

You can copy the URL of the selected Bookmark. For

the copy, see “Copying/Cutting/Pasting” (P219).

Compose message

You can paste the URL of the selected Bookmark to

the text of i-mode mail and send it. Go to step 2 of

“Composing i-mode mail” (P149).

Send

Send a selected bookmark via infrared communication.

Send all

Send all bookmarks via infrared communication.

: For infrared communication, see “Using infrared communication”

(P182).

122

i-mode

Displaying Screen memo

C](i-mode) ]3

You can display the web pages saved without connecting

to i-mode.

• For the registration method for the site screen, see

“Using the submenus for the Site screen” (P130).

1. From the i-mode menu (P119), “Screen memo”

2. Select a screen memo ]C

• The Screen Memo List screen appears.

Using the Submenus of the Screen Memo

Screen

1. From the Screen memo List screen (See above)

[Menu] ]Select from the following submenu

items

View

You can display the selected screen memo.

Edit title

You can edit the title of the selected screen memo.

Delete

You can delete the selected screen memo.

Delete selected

You can select and delete multiple screen memos.

After selecting,

[Menu]

Select “Delete”.

Delete all

You can delete all the screen memos. To delete all,

enter terminal security code >C[OK].

URL

You can display the URL of the selected screen

memo.

Protect ON/OFF

You can give or cancel protection for the selected

screen memo. You cannot delete protected screen

memos.

i-mode

DescriptionIcon

Protected Screen

memo

Unprotected Screen

memo

123

i-mode

Using the Submenus of the Screen Memo

Screen

1. From the Screen memo display See left M[Menu]

]Select from the following submenu items

Save graphics 1

You can select and save an image contained in a

screen memo. You can confirm the saved image by

“My picture” of “Data box”>”i-mode” folder. >P166

Show properties

–URL : You can display the URL of the displayed

screen memo.

–Page properties : You can check the title and URL

of the displayed screen memo.

–Certificates 2:You can display the certificate used

by the displayed screen memo.

Retry 3

A GIF animation is played back from the beginning.

Edit title

You can edit the title of the displayed screen memo.

Delete

You can delete the displayed screen memos.

Protect ON/OFF

You can activate or cancel protection for the displayed

the page. You cannot delete protected saved pages.

1: This menu is not selected in case the selected screen memo

does not include an image.

2: This menu is not selected in case the certificate is not used for

the displayed screen memo.

3: This menu is not selected in case the selected screen memo

does not include of GIF animation.

Displaying Last URL

C](i-mode) ]4

When you exit i-mode, the URL of the page displayed last is

stored as “Last URL”. Using “Last URL”, you can connect to

the site or Internet web page you visited last time.

1. From the i-mode menu (P119), “Last URL” ]I

[Done]

Information

• If you press Cin screen of URL, you can edit the latest URL

address.

Displaying Internet Web Pages

C](i-mode) ]5

You can display web pages supporting i-mode and

directly access sites from the history of the sites you

visited by entering their URLs.

i-mode

124

i-mode

1. From the i-mode menu (P119), “Go to location” ]

Select from the following items

Input address

You can display Internet web pages supporting i-mode

by entering URLs. After entering, press I[Done] to

access.

URL history

You can directly access sites by selecting URLs you

visited from the URL history.

Information

• You can enter URL up to 256 half-pitch characters.

• You can view the list up to 50 address in URL history.

• Depending on the type of the accessed Internet site, the page

may not be displayed correctly.

• Web pages other than Internet web pages supporting i-mode

may not be displayed correctly.

Using the Submenus of the URL Screen

1. From URL history screen, press M[Menu] ]

Select from the following submenu items

Connect

You can connect the site in URL history.

Edit URL

You can connect URL in history after editing URL

address.

Delete

You can delete the history of URL.

Delete all

You can delete the history of all registered URL. To

delete all, enter terminal security code >C[OK].

Compose message

You can compose i-mode mail with attaching URL to

the text. Go to step 2 on page 149 of “Composing i-

mode mail”.

Displaying MessageR/F

C](i-mode) ]6

You can display received MessagesR/F.

• MessageR:

Your required information is delivered automatically

once you apply for the message service on the site

providing the service.

• MessageF:

Messages are delivered free of charge by performing

the Received settings in the option settings. Refer to

“Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]” for how to set it

up.

: If you subscribed to the FOMA service after October 1, 2004,

the setting at purchase is “Receive”.

i-mode

125

Information

•You can save up to 100 MessageR and up to 50 MessageF.

Depending on the size of messages, the number of savable

messages may be smaller.

•If a message is attached to the received MessageR/F, the

melody will be played automatically when you display the

message.

Icons on the MessageR/F List Screen and the

Display MessageR/F Screen

i-mode

DescriptionIcon

Unread MessageR/F

Read MessageR/F

Protected MessageR/F

Subject

An image is attached.

A file with the UIM operation restriction function

set up is attached.

MessageR/F with a file attached or pasted

A melody is attached.

A melody is pasted.

Received date and time

126

i-mode

Using the Submenus of the MessageR/F

List Screen

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P256

1. From the MessageR/F List (P125), M[Menu] ]

Select from the following submenu items

Delete

You can delete the selected MessageR/F.

Delete selected

You can select and delete multiple MessagesR/F. After

selecting, M[Menu] >Select “Delete”.

Delete all

You can delete all the MessagesR/F. To delete all,

enter terminal security code >C[OK].

Protect ON/OFF

You can give or cancel protection for the selected

MessageR/F. You cannot delete protected MessagesR/F.

Sort

You can sort MessagesR/F displayed on the List

screen.

Filter

You can change types of the MessageR/F displayed

on the List screen.

Using the Submenus of the Display

MessageR/F Screen

1. From the Display MessageR/F screen (P125),

M[Menu] ]Select from the following submenu

items

Delete

You can delete the displayed MessageR/F.

Protect ON/OFF

You can give or cancel protection for the displayed

MessageR/F. You cannot delete protected

MessagesR/F.

Add to phonebook 1

You can add phone number or mail address displayed

on the MessageR/F to phonebook. Go to step 2 on page

64 of “Adding to Phonebook”.

Save attach file 2

You can save the melody ( ) or image ( )

attached to the MessageR/F. You can view the saved

melody or the image in “Melody”/“My picture” of “Data

box”

“i-mode” folder.

P166, P176

1: Activate this menu after selecting the phone number or mail

address that can be registered. If no item exists, you cannot

activate this function.

2: You can activate this function after selecting the file saved in.

If the file to save does not exist, you cannot use this file.

i-mode

127

i-mode

Automatically Receiving MessageR/F

If you are in the FOMA service area, MessageR/F are sent

automatically.

1. Receive a MessageR or MessageF

•

(White) or (White) is displayed.

2. The reception results are displayed

• To confirm the received MessageR/F immediately,

select “MessageR”/“MessageF” and press C.

•Q: Returns to previous screen.

Checking Whether Center Holds

MessageR/F

C](i-mode) ]7

You can check whether the i-mode Center holds any i-

mode mail and/or MessageR/F that arrived while the

phone was out of the service area or turned off.

1. From the Stand-by screen, press M[Mail] for 2 or

more seconds

• The Check Result screen appears. To read the

received MessageR/F immediately, select

“MessageR”/“MessageF” and press C.

Information

•If the i-mode Center holds i-mode mail and/or a MessageR/F,

an icon (P31) is displayed. Note that the icon may not be

displayed if i-mode mail or a MessageR/F arrived at the

i-mode Center while the FOMA phone was turned off.

Setting Functions of i-mode

You can set functions of i-mode and MessageR/F.

i-mode

128

i-mode

Home

C](i-mode) ]81

You can set the URL of a web page displayed when “Home”

is selected and whether to enable/disable “Home” (P121).

Setting items/Setting at purchase >P234

1. From the i-mode menu (P119), “i-mode setting” ]

“Home”

2.“Enable” or “Disable”

3. Select the URL field ]C]Enter a URL ]C

• If “ [Done] Disable” is selected, you cannot enter a

URL.

4. I[Done]

View

C](i-mode) ]82

You can set functions related to displaying sites and

screen memos.

Setting at purchase >P234, 235

1. From the i-mode menu (P119), “i-mode setting” ]

“View” ]Select from the following setting items ]

After setting, I[Done]

Character size

You can change the character size for text of sites,

screen memos pages and MessagesR/F.

Image display

You can set whether to display images contained in

sites, or screen memos.

Scroll

You can set the number of lines scrolled when

pressing Hon a display displaying text of sites,

screen memos or MessagesR/F.

Message list disp.

You can set how to display MessageR/F list (the

number of lines).

: Images of MessageR/F are displayed regardless of this setting.

Certificates

C](i-mode) ]83

You can set a certificate used for displaying SSL-enabled

sites.

1. From the i-mode menu (P119), “i-mode setting” ]

“Certificates” ]M[Menu] ]Select from the

following setting items

Certificate info

You can view the selected certificate.

Valid/Invalid

You can set whether to validate or invalidate the

selected certificate.

• You can check the status of a certificate by the

following symbols. : Valid : Invalid

i-mode

129

i-mode

Information

• If “Valid/Invalid” is set to “Invalid”, you cannot display the sites

with that certificate.

Others

C](i-mode) ]84

You can set i-mode connection timeout and the type of

message to check. You can also check the i-mode

settings.

Setting items/Setting at purchase >P235

1. From i-mode menu (P119), “i-mode setting” ]

“Others” ]Select from the following setting items

Connection timeout

It may take time to download from some sites. You

can set the time to wait before canceling

downloading. After setting, press I[Done].

i-motion auto play

You can set whether to play back an i-motion movie

automatically when you download a standard (normal)

type of i-motion movie from a site. After setting, press

I[Done].

Check new message

You can set the contents to check by performing

“Check new message” from among i-mode mail,

MessageR or Message F. After setting, press

I[Done].

Check settings

You can check the individual “i-mode setting”.

Reset settings

You can reset each of the “i-mode setting” to their

defaults. To reset the settings, enter terminal security

code >C[OK].

Reset data

You can delete all data related to i-mode (Bookmark,

Screen memo, URL history) except for MessageR/F.

To reset the data, enter terminal security code >C

[OK].

Information

• Even when you have set “Connection Timeout” to “Unlimited”,

you may be disconnected depending on radio wave

conditions.

i-mode

130

i-mode

Displaying Sites

You can connect to sites by easy key operation, and use

various types of services offered by IPs (Information Service

Providers). (For some sites, you may be required to apply to

the IPs separately.)

1. From the i-mode menu (P119), “iMenu”

• blinks during i-mode communication.

2. Select an item (link) ]C

<Site>

•FE: You can scroll the menu.

•P: You can end i-mode.

Information

• If there is a number in front of the item showing the link, you

can connect to that link directly by pressing the same number

on the keypad. Note that some sites cannot be connected.

• Depending on the site, images may not be displayed.

• Depending on the site connected, the confirmation screen

may appear stating that mobile phone information is sent.

Your mobile phone information (the model and the serial

number of your mobile phone) is sent to the IP (Information

Service Provider) over the Internet, so could be perceived by

third parties. The phone number, address or age are not sent

to IP (Information Service provider).

Using the Submenus of the Site Screen

1. From the Site screen (See left), M[Menu] ]Select

from the following submenu items

Add bookmark

You can add the displayed URL of the Site to Bookmark.

The bookmark screen is displayed, and you can register

the site by pressing I[Done]. You can access directly

to the site from the registered bookmark. >P121

Add screen memo

You can save a displayed web page as a screen

memo. You can display saved screen memos without

connecting to i-mode. >P122

Save graphics 1

You can select and save an image contained in a web

page.

P134

Show properties

–URL : You can check the URL of the displayed site.

–Page properties : You can check information on

the displayed web page.

i-mode

131

i-mode

–Certificates 2:You can check the certificate used

in the displayed site.

Bookmark list

You can view a list of bookmarks registered by “Add

bookmark”. If you select a bookmark, you can directly

access the site.

Go to location

–Input address : You can access web pages

supporting i-mode by entering URL. After entering it,

press I[Done] to connect to the site.

–URL history : You can select the URL history of a

displayed site to directly access the web page.

Screen memo list

You can view a list of pages saved as “Screen Memo”.

You can display the saved page by selecting it.

You can bring up the iMenu display.

Home

You can display the web page registered as “Home”

(P128).

Reload

You can reload data of a site. The contents of the site

will change to the latest information each time you

reload if the site has been updated.

Compose message

You can send the URL of site being displayed or the

URL for link with them attaching to the message text.

Go to step 2 on page 149 of “Composing message”.

Change char. code

When characters are not displayed correctly, you can

convert them to the correct ones.

Add to phonebook 3

You can add the phone number and mail address

displayed on the web page to the phonebook. Go to

step 2 on page 64 of “Adding to phonebook”.

Retry 4

You can play back a GIF animation from the beginning.

1: You cannot activate this menu in case the image that can be

saved is not included in a site or “Image” is set not to display.

(P128)

2: If no certificate is used in the site, you cannot use this menu.

3: Activate this menu after selecting the phone number or mail

address to register. Otherwise, you cannot activate this menu.

4: You cannot activate this menu when GIF animation is not

included in displayed site.

132

i-mode

Information

• Some sites may not be saved as bookmarks.

• When characters are not displayed correctly even after

“Change char. code”, repeat the operation. However, even if

you repeat this operation, the correct characters may not

come up. The original characters are displayed if you repeat

the operation 4 times.

• If you perform “Change char. code” when the correct

characters are displayed, wrong characters may come up

instead.

SSL Pages

SSL pages use data encryption for data transmission to

prevent hacking and source-file overwriting so that you

can more safely exchange personal information.

• If you try to display an SSL-enabled page, the SSL

communication starting message appears. When an

SSL page is displayed, appears.

• When moving from an SSL page to an ordinary page,

the confirmation display appears. After “Yes” is

selected, a regular page is displayed and

disappears.

How to See/Use Sites

Entering/Selecting Information on Sites

When you use a site, you may enter characters (text box) or

select an item from multiple options (radio button, checkbox,

pull down menu).

i-mode

Used for item selection.

You can select only 1 item.

Radio button

Used for item selection.

You can select multiple

items.

Checkbox

Display

Example Description

Name

You can enter characters.Text box

Used for item selection. If

you select a pull down

menu, a list of selectable

items is displayed.

Pull down

Password

Tokyo

Saitama

Kanagawa

Unselected

Selected

Unselected

Selected

133

i-mode

Returning to Obtained Previous Page/Going

to Obtained Next Page

The FOMA phone stores the last few screens displayed.

1. To display the previous page, L

To display the next page, R

Operations from Highlighted Information

You can easily make calls, send mails, and display Internet

web pages using highlighted information (phone numbers,

mail addresses, URLs, and so on) displayed on sites and in

mail and MessageR/F.

Phone To function/AV Phone To function

You can make a call by selecting displayed information

such as a phone number.

• You may not be able to use the Phone To/AV Phone To

function depending on the site.

1. Select information such as a phone number ]C

2. “Voice call”/“Video-phone call”

• You can make a call after setting the Caller ID

notification according to the screen.

Information

• You can add phone number information displayed on a web

page to the phonebook using the submenu of the site screen.

Mail To function

You can send mails by selecting displayed information

such as a mail address.

• You may not be able to use the Mail To function

depending on the site.

1. Select information such as a mail address ]C

• Go to step 2 of “Composing i-mode mail” (P149).

Information

• You can add mail address information displayed on a web

page to the phonebook using the submenu of the site screen.

Web To function

You can access a web page by selecting displayed

information such as a URL.

• You may not be able to use the Web To function

depending on the site.

1. Select information such as URL ]Press C

• If the confirmation screen to connect appears, press

I[Yes].

i-mode

134

i-mode

i-appli To function

You can start i-appli by selecting the displayed URL (link).

1. Select i-appli information ]C]I[Yes]

Information

• If “i-appli To” (P162) is set to “OFF”, you cannot start i-appli by

this operation.

Downloading Images from Sites

You can set images saved from the displayed web page

or screen memos. You can check the saved images in

“My picture” of “Data box” >“i-mode” folder. >P166

1. Displaying Site / Saved Page screen ]

[Menu]

]“Save graphics” ]

]Select an image ]

]“Yes”

Information

• Some images may not be saved.

• You cannot select “Save graphics” if the image that can be

saved is not included or “Image” (P128) is set not to be saved.

Downloading i-melody from Sites

You can download a melody from a site and set it.

Download a melody from a site. A saved melody can be

checked by “Melody” of “Data box” >“i-mode” folder

(P176).

1. Display a site that supports downloading of

melodies ]Select a melody ]C

• After the download is completed, the confirmation

screen appears.

2. Video content menu

• “Play”: You can play the downloaded melody.

• “File Protection”: You can view the information of

i-motion downloaded from network.

• “Back”: You can return to the site without saving the

melody.

Information

• Depending on the site, you may not be able to download

melodies.

• Some downloaded melodies may not be played back

successfully.

i-mode

135

i-mode

Obtaining i-motion Movies from Sites

The i-motion movie is a moving image file containing

images and sound. Acquired i-motion can be checked by

“i-motion” of “Data box” >“i-mode” folder (P173).

• See “Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]” for details.

1. Select an i-motion movie on a site that supports

downloading of i-motion movies ]C

• When downloading is done, the confirmation screen

appears.

2. Video content menu

• “Play”: You can play i-motion downloaded from

network.

• “File property”: You can view the information of

i-motion downloaded from network.

• “Back”: You can return to the site without saving

i-motion.

Information

• You can change the playback methods for while downloading

i-motion movies. >P129

• Some downloaded i-motion movies might not be played back

correctly.

• You cannot download i-motion movies of the streaming type

and the ASF format.

Using My Menu

If you register frequently-used sites in My Menu, you can

access them easily.

Registering Sites in My Menu

Bring up the page of the site to be registered

]

Select

“Register My Menu”

2. Select the i-mode password text box ]C]Enter

the i-mode password ]C]“Select”

• For i-mode password, see “Changing i-mode

Password”.

Information

• Some sites may not be registered in My Menu.

• If you subscribe to Menu/Search in a pay site, it will be

registered in My Menu automatically.

Displaying Sites from My Menu

1. From the Stand-by display, I[i-mode] ]“iMenu”

]“My Menu” ]Select a site to access ]C

i-mode

136

i-mode

Changing i-mode Password

The “i-mode password” (4 digits) is required to subscribe to

and unsubscribe from message services and i-mode pay

sites, and to perform i-mode mail settings. At purchase, this

password is set to “0000” (4 zeros), so you need to change

it to your own i-mode password. Be sure not to let others

know your i-mode password.

1.On the Stand-by display, I[i-mode] ]“iMenu” ]

“English” ]“Options” ]“Change i-mode

Password”

2. Select the “Current Password” text box ]C]

Enter your i-mode password (4 digits) ]C

• At purchase, the setting is “0000”, so enter “0000”

for the first time.

3. Select the “New Password” text box ]C]Enter

a new i-mode password (4 digits) ]C

4. Select the “New Password (Confirmation)” text box

]C]Enter a new i-mode password (4 digits) ]

C]“Select”

• Enter the same number as you entered in step 3.

Information

• If you forget your i-mode password, you can have it reset to

“0000” at a handling counter such as a DoCoMo shop. You

will be required to show your official identification (driver’s

license, etc.).

137

Mail Menu .............................................138

i-mode Mail...........................................138

Displaying Mail in Inbox.......................139

Displaying Mail in Outbox....................144

Displaying Mail in Unsent message ....147

Composing Mail ...................................149

Checking New i-mode mail and

Message ...............................................154

Receiving Selected Mail ......................154

Checking whether Center Holds SMS....155

Changing Mail Setting..........................155

Mail

Select

Inbox

On the Stand-by display, C[Menu] ]

(Mail) or “Mail”

To display the Mail menu

Select

Mail

Mail Menu

On the mail menu, the mail functions offered by the FOMA

phone are displayed.

i-mode Mail

The i-mode phone has the mail functions for exchanging e-

mail (electronic mail) via the Internet. You need to subscribe

to “i-mode” to use i-mode mail.

• See “Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]” for more

details.

• This model does not support all the services described

in “Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode].” Check which

models support which services in “Mobile Phone User's

Guide [i-mode]”.

SMS messages (short messages)

You can send and receive SMS messages between

FOMA phones without subscribing to i-mode.

Sending and receiving SMS messages with subscribers to

overseas carriers in addition to DoCoMo are also

available. For information on the countries and overseas

carriers with which SMS messages can be exchanged,

see the International Service web page of DoCoMo.

• Refer to “Network Services User’s Guide” for more details.

138

Mail

DescriptionMenu item

Inbox You can check the records and contents of

received i-mode mails and SMS messages.

You can check the records and contents of

sent i-mode mails and SMS messages.

You can check the contents of temporarily

saved i-mode mails and SMS messages.

You can bring up the display to compose

i-mode mails and SMS messages.

You can receive i-mode mails held at the i-

mode Center.

You can receive SMS messages by checking

the SMS Center.

Outbox

Unsent

message

Compose mail

Check new

message

Receive option You can check the subjects of i-mode mail held

at the i-mode Center and select mail to receive,

or delete mail at the Center before receiving it.

Check new

SMS

Mail setting You can change the settings of each mail

function of the FOMA phone.

Displaying Mail in Inbox

C](Mail) ]1

The inbox folder list is displayed. You can sort mails by

folder. You can check the records and contents of

received i-mode mails and SMS messages.

1. From the Mail menu (P137), “Inbox”

2. Select a folder ]C

•J/FE: You can view previous or after pages for

multiple pages.

3. Select mail ]C

•I

[Reply]: You can reply the receiver. Go to step 3 on

page 149 of “Composing i-mode mail” / step 3 of page

152 “Composing SMS”.

•J: You can view previous or next mail.

•FE: You can scroll the screen.

Information

• To delete all displayed the contents in box setting “Security”

(P156), enter terminal security code >C[OK].

• The deco mail via FOMA phone includes of text and URL.

If you select the URL, you can read deco mail. >P144

• You can save up to 400 received mails/SMS. Depending on

the size of mails/SMS messages, the number of mails/SMS

messages to save may be fewer.

SubjectŦ3

The time to receive the mailŦ1 SenderŦ2

The mail you receive is displayed on a

time basis that day. From the next

day on, each message is displayed by

the date when you received it.

The name is displayed when the

entry is saved in phonebook.

SMS is displayed as “SMS”

Ŧ1:

Ŧ2:

Ŧ3:

The number of unread mails

SelectMenu

Folder

Inbox (1)

1/1

139

Mail

Icons on the Received Mail Folder List Screen

Received Mail List and Marks on Display Screen

: Appears only on the Received Mail Display Screen.

140

Mail

DescriptionIcon

Unread mail messages

Read mail messages

Unread SMS messages

Read SMS messages

Unread SMS reports

Folder with unread mails/SMS messages

Created folder without unread mails/SMS

messages

Created folder with unread mails/SMS

messages

(gray)

(blue)

DescriptionIcon

(gray) Folder without unread mails/SMS messages

Mail received as To-type

Mail received as Cc-type

Mail received as Bcc-type

Cc-type broadcast mail address

A melody is attached.

A melody is pasted.

Received date and time

i-appli launch information is pasted.

A URL or i-motion file is attached.

To-type broadcast mail address

An image of up to 10,000 bytes is attached.

A URL of i-shot is attached.

An attached file is damaged.

A pasted melody is damaged.

Read SMS reports

Unread SMS messages in the UIM

Read SMS messages in the UIM

Protected mails

Forwarded mails

Replied mails/SMS messages

Subject

Mail with a file to which the UIM

restrictions are set attached

Mail with a file attached or pasted

141

Mail

Using the Submenu of the Received Mail Folder

List Display

1. On the Received Mail Folder List screen (P139), M

[Menu] ]Select from the following submenu items

Create folder

You can add a folder.

Rename folder

You can edit the name of the selected folder.

Delete folder

You can delete the selected folder. You cannot delete

a folder if a mail is saved.

Auto sort

You can set sort conditions to the selected folder. Go

to step 2 of “Distributing the received mail to the

folder automatically” (P143).

: These operations are not available when you select Inbox.

Using the Submenu of the Received Mail

List Screen

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P256

On the Received Mail List screen (P139), M[Menu] ]

Select from the following submenu items

Move to folder 1

You can move the selected mails and messages to

other added folders.

Delete

You can delete the selected mails and messages.

Delete selected

You can select and delete multiple mails and messages.

After selecting mail messages, M[Menu] >Select

“Delete”.

Delete all

You can delete all mail messages in the folder. To delete

all, enter terminal security code >C[OK].

Protect ON/OFF 1

You can set or cancel the protection of the selected

mails and messages. Protected mail cannot be

moved/deleted.

Sort

You can sort the mails and messages displayed on

the List display.

Filter

You can change the type of the mails and messages

displayed on the List display.

UIM 2

You can move and copy the selected SMS messages

in the FOMA phone to the UIM, and move and copy

the SMS messages in the UIM to the FOMA phone.

1: You cannot use this menu for SMS in the UIM.

2: You cannot use this menu for protected SMS or SMS delivery

report.

Mail

142

Mail

Using the Submenu of the Received Mail

Display Screen

1. On the Received Mail List screen (P139), M[Menu]

]Select from the following submenu items

You can reply after selecting the method to reply. Go to

step 3 on page 149 of “Composing i-mode mail”/ step 3

on page 152 of “Composing SMS”.

– Reply 1:You can reply to the sender of i-mode mail

from the detailed received mail list.

– Reply quoted 1:You can send the reply quoting the

original text in your received i-mode mail.

– Reply all 1:You can reply all receivers and senders

at the same time.

– Reply quoted all 1:You can reply all receivers and

senders with quoting the original text in your

received i-mode mail.

Forward

You can forward the displayed mail to other party. Go

to step 2 (P149) of “Composing i-mode mail” or step

2 (P152) of “Composing SMS messages.

Move to folder 2

You can move the displayed mail to other added folders.

Delete

You can delete the displayed mail.

Protect ON/OFF 2

You can set or cancel the protection to the displayed

mail. The protected mail messages cannot be

moved/deleted.

Store Address

You can register mail address / phone number of

receiver on displaying the mail. Go to step 2 on page

64 of “Adding to Phonebook”.

Add to phonebook 3

You can add the mail address / phone number written

on the displayed mail text to the phonebook. Go to

step 2 of “Adding to Phonebook” (P64).

Save attach file 4

You can save an image ( ) and a melody ( ) of up

to 10,000 bytes attached to the displayed mail. You

can check the saved images by selecting “Data box”.

>“My picture”. >“i-mode” folder. >P166, P176

Copy

• For copying after selecting the following items, see

“Copying/Cutting/Pasting” (P219).

– Body: You can copy the text.

– Subject 1:You can copy the title.

–

Sender: You can copy e-mail address / phone number

of the sender.

UIM 5

You can move / copy the displayed SMS message in

the FOMA phone to the UIM, and move / copy the

SMS messages in the UIM to the FOMA phone.

1: This menu is not displayed for SMS.

2: You cannot use this menu for SMS of UIM.

3: Activate this menu after selecting mail address / phone number

to register. If nothing to be registered is included, you cannot

activate this function.

4: Activate this menu after selecting the file to save. If the file to

Mail

143

Mail

5: You cannot activate this function for i-mode mail or protected

SMS.

Information

• The Submenu items for the SMS report / voice mail incoming

notification display screen are “Move to folder”, “Delete,” and

“Protect ON/OFF” only.

Distributing the received mail to the folder

automatically

The mails / SMS messages is applicable for the condition

can be saved to the folder automatically. You can set this

only to additional folder.

1. On the Received Mail Folder List screen (P139),

select a folder to specify conditions ]M[Menu]

]Auto Sort

• The screen for automatic sort is displayed.

2. M[Menu] ]Select submenu.

Address 1 2

You can enter e-mail address or phone number to

distribute each folder.

– Open phonebook: You can enter the phone

number searching from phonebook.

– Input address: You can directly enter the address.

When you enter e-mail address, you input correctly

to a domain (the part of after @ mark).

Subject 1 2

You can input the subject of mail to distribute a folder.

Release

You can cancel one of conditions of distribution of folder.

Release all

You can cancel all distribution conditions of folders.

1 : When a received mail contains multiple conditions, it is

distributed to the top folder of the folder list that corresponding

condition is set.

2 : You cannot set the multiple conditions in the same folder.

Receiving i-mode Mail/SMS Messages

Automatically

When the FOMA phone is in the service area, it

automatically receives i-mode mail/ SMS messages.

1. A mail or an SMS message is received

• (White) or (White) is displayed.

2. The result of the reception is displayed

• If you want to check the received i-mode mail

message immediately, select “i-mode mail”, and

press C.

•If you want to check the received SMS message

immediately, press C

•Q: Go to previous screen.

Mail

144

Mail

Saving Images over 10,000 bytes

A JPEG image over 10,000 bytes is not downloaded

properly to the FOMA handset. Therefore, you can save it

after extracting the data from URL for image view in mail

text, and connecting i-shot center.

1. On the Received Mail Folder List screen (P139),

select “URL” ]C]“Yes”

• For the method of saving images, see “Obtaining

Images from Sites” (P134).

Information

• You can view the contents of received Deco-mails in this way.

Downloading i-motion Movies from i-motion Mail

Data of i-motion mail is not downloaded to the FOMA phone

even when it is received. You need to access the i-motion

mail Center from its URL given to the mail text to see an i-

motion movie to download and save the data. The saved i-

motion can be checked in “i-motion” of “Data box” >

“i-mode” folder (P173).

1. From the Received Mail Folder List screen (P139),

select the URL ]C]I“Yes”

• Downloading of i-motion starts.

• The i-motion is played while being downloaded in the case

it is possible.

2. After downloading, press Q

• “Play”: You can play downloaded i-motion.

• “File property”: You can view information of

downloaded i-motion from a site.

• “Back”: The site will be returned, not saving i-motion.

Displaying Mail in Outbox

C](Mail) ]2

The Sent Mail List is displayed. You can check the records

and contents of sent i-mode mail and SMS messages.

1. From the Mail menu (P137), select “Outbox”.

•K/FE: Display the previous or next page for multiple

pages.

SubjectŦ3

The time to send the mailŦ1 ReceiverŦ2

The mail you receive is displayed

on a time basis that day. From

the next day on, each message is

displayed by the date when you

received it.

The name is displayed when the

entry is saved in phonebook.

SMS is displayed as SMS

Ŧ1:

Ŧ2:

Ŧ3:

Mail

2. Select a mail ]C

•J: Display the previous or next page.

•FE: Scroll by screen.

Information

• To display the box which is set “Security” (P156), enter

terminal security code >C[OK].

• You can save up to 400 mails / SMS. Depending on the size

of mails / SMS messages, the number of mails / SMS

messages that can be saved may be smaller.

Icons on the Sent Mail List display and the Sent Mail

display screen

: Appears only on the Sent Mail Display Screen.

SubjectŦ

The time to send the mailŦ

ReceiverŦ

145

Mail

Description

Icon

Mail successfully sent

Mail failed to be sent

Description

Icon

An image of up to 10,000 bytes is attached.

An image (JPEG) of over 10,000 bytes is attached.

Moving images are attached.

A corrupted melody file is attached.

A corrupted file is attached.

Sent SMS messages in the UIM

Protected mail / SMS messages

Mail with a file attached

Mail with an attached file to which UIM

restrictions are set

Mail address failed to be sent as To-type mail

Mail address successfully sent as Cc-type mail

Mail address failed to be sent as Cc-type mail

Mail address successfully sent as Bcc-type mail

Mail address failed to be sent as Bcc-type mail

A pasted melody file is attached.

An i-appli activation information file is attached.

A melody is attached.

Subject

Mail address successfully sent as To-type mail

Sent date and time

SMS message successfully sent

SMS message failed to be sent

146

Mail

Using the Submenu of the Sent Mail List

Screen

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P256

1. From the Sent Mail Folder List screen (P144), M

[Menu] ]Select from the following Submenu items

Edit

You can edit the selected mail again. See “Composing

i-mode mail” (P149) / “Composing SMS messages”

(P152).

Delete

You can delete the selected mail.

Delete selected

You can select and delete multiple mail messages. After

selecting mail messages, M[Menu] >Select “Delete”.

Delete all

You can delete all mail messages in the Sent box.

To delete all, enter terminal security code >C[OK].

Protect ON/OFF 1

You can set or cancel the protection to the selected

mail. Protected mail cannot be deleted.

Sort

You can sort the mail messages displayed in the list

screen.

Filter

You can change the type of the mail messages

displayed in the list screen.

UIM 2

You can move and copy the selected SMS message

in the FOMA phone to the UIM, and move and copy

the SMS messages in the UIM to the FOMA phone.

1 : You cannot use this menu for SMS in the UIM.

2 : You cannot use this menu for i-mode mail or SMS delivery

report.

Using the Submenu of the Sent Mail Display

Screen

1. From the Sent Mail Display screen (P145), M

[Menu] ]Select from the following Submenu items

Edit

You can edit the displayed mail again. Go to step 2 in

“Composing i-mode mail” (P149) /“Composing SMS

messages” (P152).

Delete

You can delete the displayed mail.

Protect ON/OFF 1

You can set or cancel the protection to the displayed

mail. The protected mail messages cannot be deleted.

Store address

You can register mail address/phone number of

receiver on displaying the mail. Go to step 2 on page

64 of “Adding to Phonebook”.

Mail

147

Mail

Add to phonebook 2

You can add the mail address and phone number of

the sender of the displayed mail to the phonebook.

Go to step 2 (P64) of “Adding to Phone Book”.

Copy 3

• For copying after selecting the item, see “Copying /

Cutting / Pasting” (P219).

– Body: You can copy the text.

– Subject: You can copy the subject.

UIM 4

You can move and copy the displayed SMS message

to the UIM, and move and copy the SMS messages in

the UIM to the FOMA phone.

1: This function is not available in SMS of UIM.

2: After selecting the mail address / phone number, you can

activate the function. If nothing that can be registered is

included, you cannot activate the menu properly.

3: This function is not available for SMS.

Information

• To display the box which is set “Security” (P156), enter

terminal security code >C[OK].

• You can save up to 400 mails / SMS. Depending on the size

of mail/ SMS, the number of mails / SMS messages that can

be saved may be smaller.

Subject

Ŧ3

The time to save

Ŧ1

Receiver

Ŧ2

The mail you save is displayed on

a time basis that day. From the

next day on, each message is

displayed by the date when you

saved it.

The name is displayed when the

entry is saved in phonebook.

SMS is displayed as “SMS”

Ŧ1:

Ŧ2:

Ŧ3:

Mail

148

Mail

Icons on the Unsent Mail List display and the Unsent

Mail display screen

: Only appears on the Unsent Mail display screen.

Using the Submenu of the Unsent Message

List Screen

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P257

1. From the Unsent Message List screen (P147),

[Menu] ]Select from the following submenu

items

Send

You can send the selected mails and messages.

Delete

You can delete the selected mails and messages.

Delete selected

You can select and delete multiple mail mails and

messages. After selecting mail messages, M[Menu]

>Select “Delete”.

Delete all

You can delete all mail messages in the folder. To

delete all, enter terminal security code >C[OK].

Sort

You can sort the mail messages displayed in the list

display.

Filter

You can change the type of the mail messages

displayed on the list display.

Mail

DescriptionIcon

Unsent mail

Unsent SMS message

Mail with a file attached

A damaged file is attached.

Subject

Address of To-type

Address of Cc-type

Mail with an attached file to which UIM

restrictions are set

Attached file

A pasted melody file is attached.

i-appli launch information is attached.

A melody file is attached.

An image file of up to 10,000 bytes is attached.

An image (JPEG) of over 10,000 bytes is attached.

A moving image file is attached.

A damaged melody file is attached.

Text

Address of Bcc-type

149

Mail

Using the Submenu of the Unsent Mail

Display Screen

From the Unsent Mail display screen (P147), press

[Menu] and select a submenu item. See “Using the

Submenu of the Compose mail display” (P150) / “Using

the Submenu of the Compose SMS Screen” (P153) for

the available submenu items.

Composing Mail

Composing i-mode Mail

C](Mail) ]41

You can create and send new i-mode mail.

1. From the Mail menu (P137), select “Compose mail”

]“Compose message”

2. Select the Address field ]

]“Enter

Address” ]Enter the address ]“Enter Address”

]

• For a menu displayed for destinations, see “Address

menu” (P150) of “Using the Submenu of the

Compose Mail Display”.

3. Select the Subject field ]

]Enter the

subject ]

• In case of not attaching the file, go to step 5.

4. Select (Attach file) field ]

]Add attached

file

• Select the file saved in “My picture” / “i-motion”

(P166) / “Melody” (P173) of Data box” (P176) /

“Melody”.

• For a menu displayed for attachment files, see

“Attach file menu” (P150) of “Using the Submenu of

the Compose Mail Display”.

• If a file is attached, it can be displayed/played by

pressing I.

5. Select the Message field ]

]Enter

message ]

[Send]

Mail

150

Mail

Information

• Depending on the radio wave conditions, the characters may

not be sent successfully to the destination.

• Half-pitch katakana or pictographs may not be displayed

properly when exchanging mails between i-mode phones.

• When you enter the destination of the phonebook that a

secret code is set, the secret code is automatically added.

However, the secret code does not remain on the destination

of the sent mail.

Using the Submenu of the Compose Mail

Display

1. From the Compose Mail display (P149),

[Menu] ]

Select from the following Submenu items

Send

You can send the i-mode mail that you are

composing or editing.

Save

You can save the i-mode mail that you are composing

or editing in unsent message.

Add address

You can add addresses. When you add addresses,

you can send same i-mode mail to multiple recipients

at the same time. You can send same mail to up to 5

addresses at a time.

– Open phonebook: You can add the address by

searching the phonebook.

– Input address: You can enter the address directly.

– Received list: Set an address selected from

received mail history.

– Sent list: Set an address selected from sent mail

history.

Address menu 1

– Open phonebook: You can add the address by

searching the phonebook.

– Input address: You can enter the address directly.

– Change to To: You can change the setting of

receiver to “To type”.

– Change to Cc: You can change the setting of

receiver to “Cc type”.

– Change to Bcc: You can change the setting of

receiver to “Bcc type”.

– Delete address: You can delete the address.

– Received list: Set an address selected from

received mail history.

– Sent list: Set an address selected from sent mail

history.

Attach file menu

– Attach file: You can select the file in “My picture”

(P166) / “i-motion” (P173) / “Melody” (P176) of “Data

box”.

– Take a picture 3:A Still Image Finder Stand-by

screen appears. >P110

Press C[Attach] on Still Image Shooting End display

to add to the attachment file.

Mail

151

Mail

– Take a movie 4:A Moving Image Finder Stand-by

screen appears. >P115

Press C[OK] on Moving Image Shooting End display

to add to the attachment file.

– Delete att. file 2:You can delete the attachment file.

– Play/ Display file 2:You can play or view the file.

Add signature

You can insert a signature at the end of the text of mail.

• You need to register the signature beforehand.

>p156

Delete body

You can delete the the text of mail that you are

composing or editing.

Delete mail

You can delete the mail under composing or editing.

1 : After selecting / / , you can operate the menu.

2 : After selecting , you can operate the menu.

3 : Unavailable when a shot still image exceeding 5,000 bytes is

already attached to an attachment file.

4 : Unavailable when a moving image/i-motion or JPEG image

exceeding 10,000 bytes is already attached to an attachment

file.

Information

• The type or receiver

– To: Ordinary receiver

– Cc: To inform the contents in addition to the receiver.

– Bcc: To inform the contents if you do not want other

receivers to know except for direct receiver.

• About attachable files

1 : Up to 10 files when the total size of a data file including

melodies, images and the text is equivalent to 5,000 full-

pitch characters (i.e., 10,000 bytes).

2 : You can attach either an image or moving image/

i-motion movie of up to 100K bytes. You can attach the

file separately from melody files and images of 10,000

bytes or less.

• You cannot attach files that are prohibited from being

attached to mail or output from the FOMA phone to other

devices.

• When a JPEG image or an i-motion movie in excess of 10,000

bytes is attached, the number of characters you can enter in

the text field decreases by the equivalent of 100 full-pitch (200

half-pitch) characters.

• The i-mode phone of the mova service cannot receive GIF

images and melodies.

• Some attached files may be deleted at the i-mode Center or

not be received, displayed, or played properly by the

recipients.

Mail

Maximum number of filesType of file

Melody

Up to 10 files 1

1 file 2

Image of 10,000 bytes

or less (JPEG, GIF)

Moving image/ i-motion movie

Image over 10,000

bytes (JPEG)

152

Mail

Using the Submenu of the Creating next

Entry Screen

From creating next Entry screen, press M[Menu] and

select a Submenu item. See “Using the Submenu of

Character Entry display” (P218) for the available Submenu

items.

Composing SMS messages

C](Mail) ]42

You can create and send SMS messages. You can send

and receive SMS messages to and from the subscribers

to overseas carriers in addition to DoCoMo. For

information on the countries and overseas carriers with

which SMS messages can be exchanged, see the

International Service web page of DoCoMo.

1. From the Mail menu (P137), select “Compose mail”

]“Compose SMS”

2. Select the Address field ]

]“Enter

Address” ]Enter the recipient’s phone number ]

• For a menu displayed for destinations, see “Address

menu” (P153) of “Using the Submenu” of the

Compose SMS Display.

3. Select the Message field ]

]Enter the

message ]

4. I[Send]

If the recipient is a subscriber to an overseas carrier

other than DoCoMo:

“+” (Press key 2 times) ]“Country code” ]

“Mobile phone number of the recipient”

“010” ]“Country code” ]“Mobile phone number

of the recipient”

• If the mobile phone number starts with 0, enter the

number by omitting “0”.

Information

• Depending on the radio wave conditions, the characters may

not be sent successfully to the destination.

• When you send an SMS message to a subscriber to an

overseas carrier, if characters that the other party does not

support are included in its text, they may not be displayed

correctly.

• If the receiver has an i-mode phone of mova service, it may

receive SMS from FOMA phone as i-mode mail.

Select SendMenu

Compose SMS

Mail

153

Mail

• If the sender does not notify caller ID (including public

phone/Unknown ID), you cannot answer to the SMS

message.

Using the Submenu of the Compose SMS

Display

1. From the Compose SMS display (P152),

[Menu]

]Select from the following Submenu items

Send

You can send an SMS message that you are

composing or editing.

Save

You can save an SMS message that you are

composing or editing in Draft box.

Address menu

– Open phonebook: You can add the address by

searching the phonebook.

– Input address: You can enter the address directly.

– Received list: Set an address selected from

received mail history.

– Sent list: Set an address selected from sent mail

history.

SMS report request

You can set whether to request a report for the SMS

message that you are composing. An SMS report is

an SMS message to notify you when your SMS

message reaches the recipient.

SMS validity term

You can set the period during which the SMS Center

holds the SMS message that you are composing or

editing when the recipient cannot receive it

immediately.

Delete body

You can delete whole sentences entered in the text.

The phone number of receiver will not be deleted.

Delete SMS

You can delete the SMS message that you are

composing or editing.

Using the Submenu of of the Character

Entering Display while Composing SMS

From the Compose SMS display, press M[Menu] and

select a submenu item. See “Using the Submenu of the

Character Entry display” (P218) for the available

Submenu items.

Mail

154

Mail

Checking New i-mode mail and Message

C](Mail) ]5

When your FOMA phone has been turned off or out of the

service area, you can check whether or not the i-mode

Center holds i-mode mail and messageR/F.

1. From the Stand-by screen, press Mfor 2 or more

seconds

• The Check results display appears. To read the

received i-mode mail immediately, select “Mail” and

press C.

Information

• When the i-mode Center holds i-mode mail and messageR/F,

the relevant icon (P31) is displayed. When mail or messages

arrive at the Center when, for instance, your FOMA phone is

turned off, the icon may not be displayed.

• When “Receive option” is set to “ON,” you will receive all mail

held at the Center if you use “Check new message.” If you do

not want to receive all mail, unmark “Mail” from the “Check

new message” (P155) beforehand.

Receiving Selected Mail

C](Mail) ]6

You can check the subject of i-mode mail held at the

i-mode Center and select mails to receive, or delete mails

at the Center before receiving them.

To use this function, you need to set “Receive option”

(P155) to “ON” beforehand. Note that, when this is “ON”,

i-mode mail cannot be received automatically.

1. From the Mail menu (P137), “Receive option”

• The phone is connected to the Center, and the

display for selecting mail to receive is displayed.

2. Select the pull-down menu for each mail ]C]

Select “Receive”, “Delete” or “Hold” ]C

3. Select “Receive/Delete” ]C

• The confirmation screen appears.

4. Select “OK” ]C

• In step 2, the mail for which “Receive” was selected

are received immediately.

Mail

155

Mail

Checking whether Center Holds SMS

C](Mail) ]7

When your FOMA phone has been turned off or out of the

service area, you can check whether or not the SMS Center

holds SMS messages.

1. From the Mail menu (P137), “Check new SMS”

• The Check results display appears. To read the

received SMS messages immediately, press C.

Changing Mail Setting

Communication

C](Mail) ]81

You can make settings related to communication of mail

and SMS messages.

Setting items/Setting at purchase >P239

1. From the Mail menu (P137), “Mail setting” ]

“Communication” ]Select from the following

setting items ]After setting,

[Done]

Receive opt. setting

You can set whether to select i-mode mail to receive.

If this function is set to “ON,” you cannot receive

i-mode mail automatically.

Receive attach file

You can set whether to receive images or melodies

attached to i-mode mail.

Check new message

When you receive messages by performing “Check

New Message,” you can select an item to check from

i-mode mail, messageR/F.

SMS report request

You can set whether to request a report for the SMS

message that you are composing. An SMS report is

an SMS message to notify you when your SMS

message reaches the recipient.

SMS validity term

You can set the period during which the SMS Center

keeps the SMS message that you are composing or

editing when the recipient cannot receive it

immediately.

Information

• The attachment file set to by “Receive attach file” cannot

be received as the file is deleted at i-mode center.

• You can receive the melody of MFi format attached to the

body of mail even if you set the “Melody” to by “Receive

attach file”.

Mail

156

Mail

Edit

C](Mail) ]82

You can make settings related to a signature to be

attached to the mail text and quotation mark for when

replying to mail.

Setting items/Setting at purchase >P239

1. From the Mail menu (P137), “Mail setting” ]“Edit”

]Select from the following setting items ]After

setting, I[Done]

Edit signature

You can set whether to automatically attach your

name and address (signature) at the end of the text

and can set the contents of the signature.

Edit quotation

You can set symbols or sentences to be attached to

the head of the original text (quotation mark) for

“Reply quoted”.

View

C](Mail) ]83

You can make the settings related to the display of mail

and SMS messages.

Setting items/Setting at purchase >P239

1. From the Mail menu (P137), “Mail setting” ]

“View” ]Select from the following setting items ]

After setting, I[Done]

Character size

You can set the character size of the text on the Mail

display screen.

Scroll

You can set the number of lines to scroll when

pressing

on the Mail display screen.

Mail list display

You can set the display method (the number of

lines/the contents displayed) on the mail list display.

Folder security

You can set security to Inbox, Outbox, and Unsent

messages in the Mail menu. To display the messages

in the box with security set, enter terminal security

code >C[OK].

Melody auto play

You can set whether to automatically play a melody

attached or pasted on the mail display screen.

157

Mail

Others

C](Mail) ]84

You can check the settings made in “Mail setting” and

reset the settings to the default.

1. From the Mail menu (P137), “Mail setting” ]

“Others” ]Select from the following setting items.

Check settings

You can check the settings made in the “Mail

settings”.

Reset settings

You can reset the settings made in the “Mail settings”

to the default. To reset settings, enter terminal security

code >C[OK].

Reset data

You can delete all mail messages and MessageR/F

stored in the FOMA phone. To reset the datal, enter

terminal security code >C[OK].

159

What is i-appli.......................................160

Downloading i-appli from Sites ...........160

Starting i-appli......................................161

i-appli

On the Stand-by display, C[Menu] ]

(i-appli) or “i-appli”

To display the Software List

SelectMenu

Software list 1/1

Select

i-appli

160

i-appli

What is i-appli

By downloading various software programs from sites and

saving them into the FOMA phone, you can automatically

update the stock prices, weather information, etc. and

enjoy games even without connecting to the network.

• Refer to “Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]” for

details.

• This model does not support all the services described

in “Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]”. Check which

models support which services described in “Mobile

Phone User's Guide [i-mode]”.

Downloading i-appli from Sites

Download software from sites and start the FOMA phone.

1. Display a site that supports downloading of i-appli

]Select an item that enables you to download the

software ]C

2. After the download is finished, C

• After the download is finished, the communication

setup display may appear. After setting, press I

[Done].

• Some software may start immediately after it is

downloaded. In this case, the software may not have

been saved. When ending the software, the

confirmation display may appear asking whether to

save it. Select “Yes” to save it.

3. “Yes”/“No”

• “Yes”: Activates i-appli.

• “No”: Returns to the Site display.

Information

• Downloading is not available at some accessed sites.

• At downloading software, the confirmation display may appear

asking whether to use the “serial number of your mobile

phone/UIM”. Select “Yes” to start downloading. In this case,

the “serial number of your mobile phone/UIM” is sent to the IP

(Information Service Provider) over the Internet, so could be

perceived by third parties. However, your phone number,

address, age and gender are not notified to the IP (Information

Service Provider) or others by this operation.

161

i-appli

Starting i-appli

C](i-appli)

1. Press I[i-mode] for 1 or more seconds from on

Stand-by display.

2. Select the software to be launched ]C

•P: End the activation of i-appli.

Icons on the Software List

• Each icon will be displayed thinly when downloading by other UIM

or upgraded of i-appli (Restriction on UIM).

Information

• Some software continues communication after downloaded.

You can let it not communicate by “Communication” setting.

Using the Submenu of the Software List

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P257

• Some submenus are not available depending on the

software.

1. From the Software List (See left), M[Menu] ]

Select from the following Submenu items

Create folder

You can create a folder.

Delete folder

You can delete a selected holder. You cannot delete a

folder in which software is saved.

Rename folder

You can edit the name of the selected holder.

Move to folder

You can move a selected software to another folder

you created.

Upgrade

You can upgrade the version of the selected software.

Delete

You can delete the selected software.

Delete selected

You can select and delete multiple software. After

selecting, M[Menu] >Select “Delete”.

DescriptionIcon

i-appli that Auto start is set

i-appli downloaded from SSL site

Normal i-appli

The folder you created

(Blue)

162

i-appli

Delete all

You can delete all softwares in i-appli. To delete all,

C>Enter terminal security code >C[Done].

Sort

You can sort software.

Properties

You can check the name, size, etc. of the selected

software.

Certificate

You can check the owner, issuer, expiration date, etc.

of the certificate used for the selected software.

Network setting

You can set whether to communicate while the

selected software is being started. After setting, press

I[Done].

i-appli To

You can set whether to start the software selected

from a site or mail. After setting, press I[Done].

Icon info setting

You can set whether icon information for i-mode mail,

SMS, messageR/F, battery level, Manner Mode, radio

wave strength and being out of area is to be used by

the software selected. After setting, press I[Done].

Autostart setting

You can set to activate the selected software

automatically. If you set to “Set”, select “Edit” and

enter the method for activation and the time. After

setting, press I[Done].

Show desc setting

You can set whether to display software information

at i-appli downloading. After setting, press I[Done].

Autostart failure

You can check information when i-appli fails to start

automatically.

Trace info

You can check information when i-appli supporting the

trace function has been terminated due to an error.

System info

You can check system information such as memory

usage status of i-appli.

: You cannot use the folder you created.

163

i-appli

Information

• Note that you may not be able to receive timely information if

you have set “Network Setting” to “OFF”.

• When you perform “Upgrade” of the software, the

confirmation display may appear asking whether to use the

“serial number of your FOMA phone / UIM”. If you select

“Yes”, version upgrade starts. In this case, your “mobile phone

number / serial number of UIM” is sent to the IP (Information

Service Provider) over the Internet, so could be perceived by

third parties. However, your phone number, address, age, and

gender are not notified to the IP (Information Service Provider)

or others by this operation.

• Since the version up of pre-installed i-appli is free of charge,

the confirmation screen asking whether to use the “serial

number of your FOMA phone / UIM” does not appear.

• If “Icon Info set” is set to “Use”, icon information for i-mode

mail, SMS, messageR/F, battery level, Manner mode, radio

wave strength and being out of area may be sent to the IP

(Information Service Provider) over the Internet just like your

“mobile phone number / serial number of UIM”, so could be

perceived by third parties. However, your phone number,

address, age, and gender are not notified to the IP

(Information Provider) or others by this operation.

Pre-installed i-appli

This game is to remove the blocks when putting the block

has a same result after multiplying the serial number.

(Brain teaser by multiplication matrix)

1. From the screen of software list (P161), select

“”]C]Select the following menu

•I[Quit]: You can end a game.

Start 1

Starts the game.

Stage 1

You can select the stage (01~10) by pressing J

Continue 2

You can resume the game on pause.

Key info

You can view the information on each button. After

displaying, press I[Menu] to return to the menu.

Help

You can view the information to remove the block.

After displaying, when you press J, you can change

the screen. Press I[Menu] to return to the menu.

Rank

You can view the status of score rank. After displaying,

you can return to the menu by pressing I[Menu].

164

i-appli

Sound

You can set the sound of game. Each time you press

C, you can turn on or off sound.

1 : You cannot see these menus on games on pause.

2 : You can see these menus only on games on pause.

Screen on game

•M[Pause]/[Resume]: You can pause the game. If you

press it again, you can resume it.

•I[Menu]: Terminate the game and display the menu.

Button on game

See Key info (P163) of menu for details.

Deleting the block

You can delete the falling blocks if you meet the following

condition. When the blocks are full from 4th line to 7th line

from the left, the game is over.

• In case the result after multiplying is 2 digits a, you can

paste the block beside same to the last number.

• See “Help” (P163), for the block except for number.

Game over

The screen of game over is displayed. If you press C,

you can view the score by displaying rank screen. If you

press I[Menu], you can return to the menu.

Information

• When you close the FOMA phone during the game, the game

is continued. The game is paused when a call comes in.

Vertical direction Horizontal direction

<Example: Combining the block of number 224>

All 3

blocks will

removed.

ŁĿ

Pause Menu

If you remove the block, the number

will be reduced. If the number is 0,

the stage will be clear.

Indicates next block.

Indicates the current stage.

If the rest of blocks are cleared, the

block will be dropped beside 1 line.

165

Introduction of Data box......................166

Displaying/Managing/

Editing Images......................................166

Playing back/Managing/

Moving Images/i-motion......................173

Playing back/Managing/Melody..........176

Data box

On the Stand-by display, C[Menu] ]

(Data box) or “Data box”

To display the Data box menu

1 My picture

2 i-motion

3 Melody

Select

Data box

Select

Data box

166

Data box

Introduction of Data box

Data box has the following items and folders:

: Folders added by the user are not included.

Displaying/Managing/Editing Images

C](Data box) ]1

You can display the shot still images, or still images

obtained from sites or i-mode mails.

The File Format To Display

• This FOMA phone supports to display file format as follows.

: Some files cannot be played depending on the file format.

Data box

Menu item ContentsFolder

My picture

i-motion

Still images etc. shot

camera.

Pre-installed still

images

Still images obtained

from sites, etc.

Pre-installed moving

images

i-motion obtained from

sites, etc.

Camera

Pre-installed

i-mode

Camera

Pre-installed

i-mode

Menu item ContentsFolder

Melody

Pre-installed

Melodies obtained from

sites, etc.

Pre-installed melodies

i-mode

Data transfer

Still images obtained

through data

transmission, etc.

Data transfer

Melodies obtained

through data

transmission, etc.

Data transfer

Moving images obtained

through data

transmission, etc.

Item

Still images usable for

frames and elements

Moving images shot by

video camera etc. File format JPEG, GIF

Pixel/File size

Up to 1280 x 1024 dots

File size

Extension name

JPEG file : Up to 700K bytes,

GIF file : Up to 500K bytes

jpg, gif

167

Data box

Displaying Images

1. From Data box menu (P165), “My picture”

2. Select a folder ]

3. Select a file ]

The mark on the image file list

: Output from the FOMA phone is inhibited or file editing is

restricted.

FullMenu Mail

File name

<Image>

•CĮFullį :

The image will be displayed

in full screen.

•IĮMailį :

You can send i-mode mail

with attaching the selected file.

Go to step 2 on page 149 of “Composing

i-mode mail”.

•J :

Displays the previous or next file.

Hp!up!Nz!qjduvsf

Camera [1/5]

OpenMenu Switch

The name and size of selected file

•I

[Mail] : You can compose i-mode

mail with attaching the selected file.

Go to step 2 on page 149 “Composing

i-mode mail”.

OpenMenu Switch

My picture [1/5]

Camera

Data transfer

0 File

4 file

Item 80 Files

Pre-installed

0 File •I [View by] : You can select

the type of listing the folder.

The number of files in the

selected folder

DescriptionMark

Previous list

The file set the restriction

Unrecognized file

168

Data box

Using the Submenu of the Folder List

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P258

1. From the Folder List (P167), M[Menu] ]Select

from the following Submenu items

Open

You can open the selected folder.

New folder

You can create a folder.

Delete

You can delete the selected folder.

Sort by

You can sort the folders.

Sorting the created folders are applied to only by the

“Name”.

View by

You can change folder display methods.

Memory info.

You can check status of the storage area on the

FOMA phone, etc.

Folder property

You can check the name, size and the number of the

files in the folder of the selected folder.

: You cannot use this menu in pre-installed folder.

Information

• If you delete a folder which includes an image set as a

wallpaper in stand-by mode, phonebook or the video-phone

call, or if you delete a folder which includes a melody set to

ringtone, alarm or schedule, each one can be returned to the

setting at purchase.

Using the Submenu of the Image File List Display

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P258

1. From the Image File List screen (P167), select a file

]M[Menu] ]Select from the following Submenu

items

New folder 1

You can create a folder.

Files 1

–View : You can display the selected file.

–Edit 2 4 :You can edit the selected file. >P171

–Move 3:You can move the selected file to other

folder. Select the folder

C>I

[Paste].

–Copy 3:You can copy the selected file to other

folder. Select the folder

C>I

[Paste].

–Delete : You can delete the selected file.

–Delete all : You can delete all the files in the folder.

You need to enter your terminal security code for

deleting.

–Rename : You can change the name of the

selected file.

169

Data box

Mark/Unmark 1

You can move, copy, and delete after selecting

multiple files. After selecting, press M[Menu] >“File”

>Select “Move”/“Copy”/“Delete”

–Mark : You can select a file at a time.

–Mark all : You can select all the files collectively.

–Unmark : You can deselect the file selected by

“Mark” or one of the files selected by “Unmark all” at

a time.

–Unmark all : You can deselect the file selected by

“Mark” or all the files selected by “Unmark all”.

Send via mail 1 4

You can attach a file to i-mode mail for sending. Go to

step 2 (P149) of “Compose i-mode mail ”.

Set as wallpaper

Select the “Main display” or “Sub display” and set as

wallpaper for the Stand-by display, etc.

Slide show

–Go : Files in the folder are displayed in order.

–Settings : You can set the “view as” and “Time

interval (secs)”. After setting, press I[Done].

Make animated GIF 1 4

You can select up to 10 files to create animation. After

selecting the files, press I[Make].

Sort by

You can sort files.

View by

You can change file display methods.

Memory info.

You can check status of the storage area on the

FOMA phone, etc.

File property

You can check the name, size and type, created time,

resolution, file restriction of the selected file.

1: You cannot use this menu in “Item” or “Pre-installed” folder.

2: You can use only JPEG file (Except for unrestricted file).

3: You cannot move and copy this menu to “Item” or “Pre-

installed” folder.

4: You cannot use this menu for restricted file.

Information

• If you delete the image set in stand-by mode, phonebook, or

video-phone, each image returns to the setting at purchase.

170

Data box

Using the Submenu of the Image Display

Setting items/Setting at purchase >P258

1. From the Image display (P167), M[Menu] ]Select

from the following Submenu itemsM

Files 1

–Delete : You can delete the displayed file.

–Rename : You can change the name of the

displayed file.

–Edit 2:You can edit the displayed file. >P171

Send via mail 1 3

You can attach a file to i-mode mail for sending. Go to

step 2 of “Compose i-mode mail” (P149).

Full

You can bring up an image on the full display hiding the

soft keys and display information.

•J: The previous image/next image is displayed.

•Q: The full display is cancelled.

Zoom

Displays an image in a large size.

•M[+]: Each time you press M, the displayed

image is enlarged.

•I[–]: The image is displayed in the previous size.

•K: You can move the display position of the

expanded image.

•Q: The zoom is cancelled.

Set as wallpaper

Select the “Main display” or “Sub display” to set as

wallpaper for the Stand-by display.

Slide show

–Go : Files in the folder are displayed in order.

–Settings : You can set the “View as” and “Time

interval (secs)” for the slide show. After the setting,

press I[Done].

Go to list

You can return to the list screen. (P167)

File property

You can check the name, size, type , created time,

resolution and file restriction of the selected file.

1: You cannot use this menu in “Item” or “Pre-installed” folder.

2: You can use only JPEG file (Except unrestricted file).

3: You cannot use this menu in restricted file.

Information

• If you delete each image which set as a wallpaper in stand-by

mode, phonebook, or video-phone call, each one can be

returned to the setting at purchase.

171

Data box

Editing Still Images

You can edit a still image. You can edit only a JPEG file.

There are some cases that you may not be able to edit. The

edited still image is saved into the folder containing the

original still image.

Setting items/Setting at purchase >P258

1. From the Image File List (P167) Display (P167),

select a file, on the Image Display screen, press

M[Menu] ]“Files” ]“Edit”

• The screen to edit the image appears.

2. From the Edit display, M[Menu] ]Select from the

following editing methods ]After setting,

C[Save] ]New file/Original file ]C

• After editing in screen, you can operate the function

as follow.

–M[Menu]: Displays the edit menu.

–I[Undo]: Undoes the edited file.

Save

You can save the edited still image.

Rotate

You can rotate a still image 90 degrees to the left or

to the right.

1) Left / Right

•M[Rotate]: You can rotate a still image 90 degrees

to the left or to the right.

•I[Cancel]: You can cancel editing.

2) Press C

Resizing

You can change the size of a still image.

Insert

–Text : You can paste a text to a still image.

• If you press M[Menu], you can change the

settings of “Font size” and “Font color”.

1) Select a text box ]C

2) Enter text ]C

•M[Text]: You can change the text box.

•I[Cancel]: Returns to previous menu.

3) C]Select a position of the text using K]

172

Data box

–Frame : A frame is added to a still image.

Select a frame to add.

1) Select a frame ]C

•M[Rotate]: You can rotate a still image 180

degrees to the left or to the right.

•I[Cancel]: Returns to previous menu.

2) Press C

–Element : An element is pasted to a still image.

• If you press M[Menu] on element selection screen,

you can select a size of the element.

1) Select an element ]C

2) Select a position to paste the element by K]

• If you continue to add same element, repeat step

•M[More]: You can change to another element.

3) I[Done]

Clipping

1) Select the size for trimming ]C

• The range for trimming is marked in red line.

2) Select the position for trimming by pressing K

• If you select “User defined size”, move the red

cursor by pressing K, and set the starting and

ending point for trimming by pressing C.

Effect

–Black & White : Makes the color tone black and

white.

–Sepia : Makes the color tone sepia.

–Negative : Reverses the color tone.

–Black & White negative : Makes the color tone

black and white and reverses the color tone.

–Color balance : After selecting “Red”, “Green” or

“Blue”, adjust the shading by pressing

–Contrast : Emphasizes or weakens contrast.

–Sharpness : Emphasizes the contour.

–Softness : Gradates the contour.

–Mosaic Blur : Applies the mosaic. Select “Square”

/ “Round” and move to red line by pressing K, and

then set the starting and ending point to apply the

mosaic by pressing C.

Mirror

Reverse the image horizontally.

Undo

Undoes the edited file.

You cannot use this menu for the file before editing.

Information

• You can perform “Resizing” only to make it smaller than the

original still image. You may not be able to change the size

depending on the display size of the original image.

• If a screen proportion of the size selected by “Resize” is

different from the original size of still image, it may be saved by

different size from selected one.

173

Data box

• In the size of still image is “1280 x 1024”, you cannot set

“Insert” or “Effect”.

• Image sizes that allow “Frame” setting are “352X288”,

“320X240”, “176X220”, “176X144” and “128X96”.

“Frame” cannot be set for frames of other sizes.

• You cannot specify a display size larger than the original still

image to “Clipping”.

• For the Text box, Frame image or Element at purchase, see

“Text” (P263), “Frame” (P262) and “Element” (P263) of “Pre-

installed”.

Playing back/Managing/

Moving Images/i-motion

C](Data box) ]2

You can play back moving images shot by the camera, or

moving images obtained from sites or i-mode mail.

Playable file format

FOMA handset can play the file as follow.

You may not be able to play some files depending on file format

even if it is compatible with a phone.

Information

• When more than 3,000 files are stored in one folder, if you try

to play a movie stored in this folder, it may not be played

properly because of lack of memory. In this case, move the file

to another folder and play.

Playing back Moving Images / i-motion

1. From the Data box menu (P165), “i-motion”

•I[Switch] : You can change the type of display of

folder.

2. Select a folder ]C

Hp!up!j.npujpo

Camera [1/6]

OpenMenu Switch

• See step 2 Display screen (P167)

for the mark on display screen

Voice file

The name and size of selected file

OpenMenu Switch

i-motion [1/5]

Camera

Data transfer

0 File

5 file

Pre-installed

1 Files

i-mode 0 File

The number of the files in the

selected folder

Codec system

File format

Extension name

MP4

MP4 file (Image: MPEG4, H.263,

Voice: AAC, AMR)

3gp

174

Data box

•I[Mail] : You can send i-mode mail attaching the

selected file. Go to step 2 on page 149 of

“Composing message”.

3. Select a file ]C

•C[Plays back]/G[Pauses]:Plays back / Pauses

•I[Stop]: Stops

•J: Plays back the previous file / next file

•J(Press and hold): The images are fast forwarded

/ fast rewound while it is pressed

•H/FE: Adjusts volume

Using the Submenu of the Folder List

See “Using the Submenu of the Folder List” of images (P168)

for the submenus available.

Using the Submenu of the Moving Image

File List

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P259

1. From the Moving Image File List (P173), select a

file ]M[Menu] ]Select from the following

Submenu items

Play

Plays back the selected file.

New folder 1

You can create a folder.

Files 1

–Move 2:You can move the selected file to another

folder. Select a folder to move >C>I[Paste].

–Copy 2:You can copy the selected file to another

folder. Select a folder to move >C>I[Paste].

–Delete : You can delete the selected file.

–Delete all : You can delete all files in the folder. If

you delete all files, you need to enter your terminal

security code.

–Rename : You can change the name of the

selected file.

Mark/Unmark 1

You can move, copy or delete multiple files. After

selecting , M[Menu] >“File” >Select “Move”/“Copy”/

“Delete”.

–Mark 2:You can select a file at a time.

–Mark all : You can select all the files collectively.

Volume

Playback bar

Playback elapsed time /

maximum playback time

Stereo / monaural

Pause StopMenu

175

Data box

–Unmark : You can deselect the file selected by

“Mark” or one of the files selected by “Mark all” at a

time.

–Unmark all : You can deselect the file selected by

“Mark” or all the files selected by “Mark all”.

Send via mail 1 3

You can attach a file to i-mode mail for sending. Go to

step 2 (P149) of “Compose i-mode mail”.

Ringtones

Set a ring alert for incoming voice and video-phone

calls.

–Voice call : Set a selected file as a ring alert for

incoming voice calls.

–Video-phone : Set a selected file as a ring alert for

incoming video-phone calls.

Sort by

You can sort files.

View by

You can change file display methods.

Memory info.

You can check the status of the storage area on the

FOMA phone, etc.

File property

You can check the name, size, type, created time,

resolution or file restriction of the selected file.

1: You cannot use the file in “Pre-installed” folder.

2: You cannot move or copy the file in “Pre-installed” folder.

3: You cannot use this menu in restricted file.

Using the Submenu of the Moving Image

Playback Screen

For MP4 file with only voice without image, see “Using the

Submenu of the Melody Playback” (P177).

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P259

1. From the Moving Image Playback display (P174),

M[Menu] ]Select from the following Submenu

items

Pause 3(Play 5)

You can pause the moving images being played

back.

Send via mail 1 2

You can compose an i-mode mail attaching a file to it for

sending. Go to step 2 (P149) of “Composing i-mode

message”.

Expand 3

You can view the whole moving image without displaying

the indication of soft key or player.

•

: cancel this function.

176

Data box

Snap 2 4

You can save paused moving images as still images.

Snapped images are saved into the “Camera” folder

of “My picture”.

Mute (Unmute)

You can play back moving images muting the sound.

Player settings

You can change settings of the visual effect and the

color tone of the player.

File property

Displays the name, size, type, created time, play

duration, restriction states, track state, availability as a

ring alert, title, creator, copyright and description of a

moving image file being played.

1: You cannot use this menu in “Pre-installed” menu.

2: You cannot use this menu for restricted file.

3: You can use this menu only on playing the file.

4: You can use this menu only on pause.

5: You can use this menu while pausing or after ending to play

back the file.

Playing back/Managing/Melody

C](Data box) ]3

You can play back pre-installed melodies, and melodies

obtained from sites, etc.

Playable file format

• This FOMA phone supports to display file format as follow.

1: Some files may not be played even if its format is supported.

2: The voice format of AAC or AMR is saved as 3gp file in “i-

motion” folder.

Information

• When more than 3,000 files are stored in one folder, if you try

to play a melody stored in this folder, it may not be played

properly because of lack of memory. In this case, move the file

to another folder and play.

Playing Back Melody

1. From the Data box menu (P165), “Melody”

•I[Switch] : You can change the display type of

folder.

Open SwitchMenu

Melody [1/3]

Data transfer 0 File

i-mode 0 File

Pre-installed

47 Files

Folder name

The number of files in the folder.

File format 1

Extension name

SMF, MFi, MP4 2

mid, mld

177

Data box

2. Select a folder ]C

•I[Mail] : You can attach the file to i-mode mail.

Go to step 2 on page 149 of “Composing i-mode mail”.

3. Select a file ]C

–C,G: Plays back / pauses

–J: Plays pack the previous file / next file

–J(Press and hold): Melodies are fast forwarded /

fast rewound while pressing it.

–H/FE: Adjusts the sound volume

–I[]: Sets the repeat area (Starting point/

Ending point) If you press after setting, you can

release it.

Information

• When you play an MFI file that auto-repeat is set. you cannot

pause (stop temporarily) while playing the file after second

play back. To pause the file, select “Pause” from the sub

menu. >P178

Using the Submenu on the Folder List

For the submenu items available see “Using the Submenu of

the Folder List” of Images (P168).

Using the Submenu of the Melody File List

See “Using the Submenu of the i-motion File List” (P174)

for the Submenus available.

Information

• If you delete the melody set as the tone for incoming call, alarm

or schedule, each melody returns to setting at purchase.

Using the Submenu of the Melody Playback

Screen

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P259

1. From the Melody Playback display (P177), M[Menu]

]Select from the following Submenu items

Playback bar

Playback elapsed time /

maximum playback time

Volume

PauseMenu

OpenMenu Switch

Pre-installed [1/46]

Go to Melody

Alarm02.mid

1.8KB

Alarm01.mid

2.3KB

Alarm03.mid

2.0KB

• See step 2 “Display screen” for the

mark on display screen.

File name/File size

178

Data box

Pause 4(Play 5)

You can pause the melody being played back.

Send via mail 1 2

You can attach melody files to i-mode mail for sending.

Go to step 2 (P149) of “Composing i-mode mail”.

Ringtones 2 3

You can set a ring tone for voice or video phone calls.

Mute (Unmute)

You can mute the tone for playing back melodies.

Set repeat 3 4

You can select a repeat method of melody.

–None : You can cancel repeat setting.

–Current file ( ) : You can repeatedly play back

the current melody.

–All files ( ) : You can repeatedly play back all

the melodies in the folder.

–Shuffle : You can shuffle and play back all the

melodies in the folder.

Area repeat ( )5

You can specify a playback area for playing back

melodies. You can set the starting point by

performing this operation. You can set the ending

point by repeating the same operation or pressing I

[].

Player settings

You can change settings of the visual effect and the

color tone of the player.

File property

You can display the name, size, type, created time,

duration, ringtone and file restriction of the selected

file.

1: You cannot use the menu in pre-installed folder.

2: You cannot use this menu for restricted file.

3: You cannot use this menu in MP4 file, if image is not recorded.

4: You can use this menu only on playing.

5: You can use this menu only on pause or after ending to play

back.

6: You cannot use this menu on pause or after ending to play

back.

Information

• You can also change settings of the ring tone from the

Melody File List Screen. From the Melody File List screen

(P177), press M[Menu] select a “Ringtone”.

179

Using Alarm ..........................................180

Setting the Custom Menu ....................181

Using the Infrared Communication

Function................................................182

Using Calculator...................................184

Using Unit Converter............................185

Using World Time.................................187

Using Stop Watch ................................188

Tools

On the Stand-by display, C[Menu] ]

(Tools) or “Tools”

To display the Tools menu

1 Alarm

2 Custom menu

3 Receive Ir data

4 Calculator

5 Unit converter

6 World time

7 Stop watch

Select

Tools

Select

Tools

180

Tools

Using Alarm

C](Tools) ]1

You can set Alarm to alert you at the specified time. You

can also set Snooze or an alarm tone.

Setting Alarm

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P242

1. From the Tools menu (P179), “Alarm”

•I[ON]/[OFF] : You can set the alarm ON or OFF.

2. Select the alarm to edit ]C]Select the item to

edit ]C]After editing, I[Done].

(Setting ON/OFF)

You can select “ON” or “OFF”. To set Alarm, select

“ON”.

Time setting

You can set the time for making the Alarm sound.

(Setting repeat)

You can select the type of repeat.

• If you set “Except holiday”, the alarm does not alert

on Sunday or holiday (P192).

(Melody)

You can select an alarm tone.

• Select from alarm tone stored in “Melody” in “Data

box”. >P176

(Memo)

You can enter an alarm name.

Turbo Alarm

Set an alarm to sound at the maximum volume and

the vibration to operate at the maximum level. Select

“OFF” when not setting the turbo alarm.

Snooze

Select the time intervals of Snooze. If you do not want

to use Snooze, select “OFF”.

If “Snooze” is set to “ON”, the alarm repeats up to 12

times.

When the Specified Time Comes

When the specified time comes, the display informing of

Alarm appears and the Alarm sounds. To stop Alarm,

perform the following operations:

•C[OFF]: Alarm stops. When Snooze is set to “ON”, it is

canceled.

•I[Snooze]: Alarm stops. The set Snooze continues.

Tools

DescriptionIcon

Alarm is set to “ON”

Alarm is set to repeat

181

Tools

aDuring a Voice/Video-phone Call

An alarm does not sound at the specified time during a

call because the icon is not displayed on upper side. After

ending the call, the alarm will be alerted on time.

• After ending to play a file/to take image, the alarm will

be sounded with displaying alarm screen.

• If you receive a voice call or video-phone call during

Alarm notification, Alarm is temporarily stopped, and

the Alarm is resumed after terminating the call.

aDuring playing back moving image, melody/

activating camera, video camera

An alarm does not sound at the specified time during a

call but the icon is displayed on upper side. After

ending the call/shooting, the alarm screen is displayed

and alarm sounds.

Information

• If the FOMA phone is not turned on, the alarm does not

sound.

• If the alarm cannot be sounded during activating i-appli, the

alarm icon blinks on upper part of the screen instead of

alarm sound to notify that the set time has come.

• The alarm sounds after i-appli is finished.

Using the Submenu of the Alarm List Screen

1. From the Alarm List screen (P180),

M[Menu]

]

Select from the following Submenu items

Edit

You can edit the selected alarm. Go to step 2 on page

180 of “Setting alarm”.

ON/(OFF)

You can activate/deactivate the selected alarm.

Mark/Unmark

Select and set 1 or more of edited alarms “ON” or

“OFF”. After selecting alarm(s), select M[Menu] >

“ON”/“OFF”.

–Mark: You can mark 1 alarm at a time.

–Mark all: You can mark all alarms at once.

–Unmark:

You can unmark 1 alarm at a time, which

you selected by “Mark” or “Mark all”.

–Unmark all: You can collectively unmark all alarms

you selected by “Mark” or “Mark all”.

Setting the Custom Menu

C](Tools) ]2

You can specify functions to store in the Custom menu. If

you store functions frequently used in the Custom menu,

you can quickly start the functions simply by pressing

Don the Stand-by display.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P242

182

Tools

From the Tools menu (P179), “Custom menu”

•C[Select]: You can activate the selected menu.

•I[Edit]: You can change the menu saved as

Custom.

2. Select a blank line ]I[Add]

• The list of functions that can be stored in the Custom

menu appears.

3. Select a function ]C

• You cannot select the menu which is already

registered.

Using the Submenu of the Custom Menu

Display

From the Custom menu display (See above), M[Menu]

]

Select from the following Submenu items

Add new 1

You can add a function to be registered from the

function list. Go to step 3 of “Setting the Custom

Menu” (See above).

Open 2

You can start the function selected.

Edit 2

You can change the functions registered. Go to step

3 of “Setting the Custom Menu” (See above).

Delete 2

You can delete a function registered at a time.

Delete all

You can delete all the registered functions collectively.

1: This Submenu item is displayed when a blank line is selected.

2: This Submenu item is displayed when a registered function is

selected.

Using the Infrared Communication

Function

C](Tools) ]3

You can send and receive data such as Phonebook and

Bookmark using the infrared communication to and from

other FOMA phones and personal computers supporting the

infrared communication function.

1 Search phonebook

2 Mail

3 i-mode

4 Camera-mode

5 Alarm

6 Select ringtone

7 [Menu7]

SelectMenu Edit

Custom menu

183

Tools

The data to send by infrared

Performing Infrared Communication

Place the FOMA phone parallel to another device so that the

infrared data ports of these devices face each other.

• The infrared data port is located on the right side of the

FOMA phone. >P28

• Place the FOMA phone on a stable location such as a

table and do not move it during communication.

• The distance for infrared communication should be

within 20 cm.

• Use Infrared communication within ±15 degrees from

the center line.

Information

• During infrared communication, do not remove the battery. If

you remove the battery during communication the data via

infrared, this operation will be stopped.

• If the battery level is low, you cannot exchange the data via

infrared. Before activating this menu, check the battery level.

• The amount of data that can be received varies depending on

the capacity of the memory. If you cannot receive data, delete

unnecessary data, and then activate infrared menu again.

• Before activating the infrared between the other phone, check

the infrared compatibility of each equipment.

• You may not be able to exchange data via infrared even if the

other party supports infrared communication function.

• While performing infrared communication, call, i-mode or data

transmission cannot be performed as the FOMA phone

becomes the same status as out of of the service area.

Sending Data

Make the receiving end ready for receiving the data and

then start sending data within 30 seconds following the

steps below.

<Example: When you want to send/receive a phonebook

via infrared communication>

1. Display of the data to be sent

]

M[Menu]

]

“Send Ir data”

]

“Focusd data”/“All data”

]

“Yes”

: Not displayed when sending a bookmark.

Data Contents

Sending / Receiving 1 or multiple

data (Phonebook of FOMA

phone) Data that can be sent /

received is name / phone number

/ mail address / note / web page.

(vCard items)

Sending / Receiving 1 or multiple

data (Bookmark of FOMA phone)

Data available in infrared

communication is title / URL.

(vBookmark items)

Own number

Phonebook

Bookmark

184

Tools

2. Make sure that the receiving end is ready for

receiving the data

]

“Yes”

• When sending all items, enter a terminal security code

(P104) and authentication password .

: Enter the same password as that entered from the

receiver's terminal.

Receiving Data

1. Select “Receive Ir data” from Tools menu (P179)

2. Perform sending operation on sender's terminal

3. “Receive”/“Receive all”

]

“OK”

• When receiving all items, enter a terminal security

code (P104) and authentication password .

• When receiving 1 bookmark, confirm a bookmark

registration screen displayed and press I[Done].

• The Phonebook will be registered to the available

smallest memory number.

• The bookmark will be registered at the top of the

bookmark list.

• You can view a received phonebook by “Search

phonebook” (P66) and bookmark by “Bookmark”

(P121).

• If you remove the battery pack or turn off the handset

while receiving a bookmark via infrared communication

and receiving is interrupted, the bookmark received

before the interruption will not be saved.

: Enter the same password as that entered from the

sender's terminal.

Using Calculator

C](Tools) ]4

You can perform calculation such as addition, subtraction,

multiplication and division. Use the numeric buttons to

enter numbers.

From the Tools menu (P179), Select “Calculator”

< Calculator screen >

•*: Used to enter decimal point.

•#: Used to enter the parenthesis.

•Q: Used to delete the number to backward from

the end.

•I[AC]: You can reset all the number and calculation.

Using the Function Menu of the Calculator Display

From the Calculator display (

See above

), M[func]

]Select from the following function menu items

+/-

Switches between positive and negative numbers.

(period) Does not go to step 2.

func. AC

Calculator

185

Tools

sin

Used for calculation of trigonometric functions.

cos

Used for calculation of trigonometric functions.

tan

Used for calculation of trigonometric functions.

log

Used for calculation of logarithmic functions.

Used for calculation of natural logarithms (the

logarithm assuming e as the base) of the specified

positive number.

exp

Used for calculation of exponential functions.

sqrt

Used for calculation of square roots (root).

deg

Specifies the unit of angle to “degree”.

rad

Specifies the unit of angle to “radian”.

Radian expresses the angle in constant number n (n

radian equals to 180 degree). 1 radian (360

degree/2/) equals to approx. 57.29578 degree, 1

degree (2//360 degree) equals to approx. 0.01745

radian (/=3.141592653).

(Step)

Enter the number ]M[=]

Using Unit Converter

This is a useful function to convert currency, surface,

length, weight, temperature, volume, and velocity.

Converting Unit of Currency

C](Tools) ]51

This is a useful function for converting the yen on hand to

the dollar, etc.

Setting at purchase >P242, P243

1. From the Tools menu (P179), “Unit converter” ]

“Currency”

• The screen for converting a currency is displayed.

(P186)

2. Select the currency ]I[Rate]

Currency unit filed

Value entry field

186

Tools

3. Select next item ]After setting, press I[Done].

Currency unit field

Select the unit of the currency. If you press C, you can

edit the currency. However, you cannot change “ ”.

Value entry field

You can set the currency exchange rate. For example, in

case you convert from (Dollar) to (Yen) (Ex. 1

120 ), you can set to 120, to 1.

•#: Enters the decimal point.

•Q: Deletes the number you entered from the

end.

Converting the currency

Converts a currency that exchange rate is set to another

currency. You can enter the currency whichever field to

convert. The value after conversion is displayed in the

other field.

1. “Unit converter” from “Tool”(P179) ]“Currency”

2. Select next item.

Currency unit field

You can select the unit before / after conversion.

Exchange rate entry field

Enter the amount of the currency to convert. The amount

after the conversion is displayed in the other field.

•#: You can enter decimal point.

•Q: Deletes the character you entered from the end.

•I[Reset]: You can reset all the number you entered.

Converting Unit of Surface

C](Tools) ]52

You can change the unit of surface. You can enter the

unit in up / down field to enter. The number after the

conversion is displayed in the other field.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P243

1. From the Tools menu (P179), “Unit converter” ]

“Surface”

• The Surface Unit Conversion display appears

Surface unit field

Value entry field

List

Surface

Acre

Hectare

187

Tools

Surface unit field

You can select the unit of surface before/after

conversion.

Value entry field

Enter a numerical value of the surface to be converted.

The number after the conversion is displayed in the

other field.

•#: Enters the decimal point.

•Q: Deletes the number which you already

entered from the end.

•I: [Reset]: The numerical value is reset.

• The maximum input value is an integer of 10 digits

and 8 digits after the decimal point. However, when

you input an actual number, the maximum input

value is 10 digits including the decimal point.

• The maximum output value is an integer of 10 digits

and 6 digits after the decimal point. However, it will

be the value rounded off to six decimal places.

Converting Unit of Length/Weight/

Temperature/Volume/Velocity

C](Tools) ]53~7

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P243,P244

1. From the Tools menu (P179), “Unit converter”

]“Length”/“Weight”/“Temperature”/“Volume”/“Ve

locity”

• For the subsequent operations, perform the same

operations as “Converting Unit of Surface” (P186).

Using World Time

C](Tools) ]6

You can check the date and time of major cities in the

world.

The time of city “Home” is set to the time of “Setting

date/time” (P95).

From the Tools menu (P179), “World time”

•C[List]: You can select a city by displaying the city

list.

2. Use Jto select a city to be checked

•I[Set]: The selected city is set as Home.

The city name and time

which are checked

188

Tools

Using the Submenu of the World Time Display

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P244

1. From the World time display (P187),

M[Menu]

]

Select from the following Submenu items

Choose city

You can choose a city. After choosing, press C.

Set time zone

Sets the selected city to home.

: This menu is not displayed if you select the city as a home.

Using Stop Watch

C](Tools) ]7

You can use the FOMA phone as a stop watch.

1. From the Tools menu (P179), Select “Stop watch”

•C[Go]/[Stop]: You can start or stop measuring.

•I[Reset]: You can reset the result of measuring.

• During measuring, you can do the following

operations.

–I[Lap]: The lap time is recorded and displayed at

the bottom of the display.

–M[Detail]: You can view the list of the lap records.

189

Using Schedule....................................190

Using Memo.........................................193

Using Date Search...............................194

Using Date Counter .............................195

Stationery

On the Stand-by display, C[Menu] ]

(Stationery) or “Stationery”

To display the Stationery menu

1 Scheduler

2 Memo

3 Date search

4 Date counter

Select

Stationery

Select

Stationery

190

Stationery

Using Schedule

C](Stationery) ]1

Storing Schedule Events

1. From the Stationery menu (P189), “Scheduler”

• The monthly display (P191) appears.

2. Select a date to store a schedule event. ]I[Add]

3. Select from the following items to store ]After

storing, I[Done]

Start date

You can set a date to start the schedule event. You

can enter a date by pressing Rand dial buttons. You

can select a date from the calendar display by

pressing C.

End date

You can set a date to end the schedule event. You can

enter a date by pressing Jand dial buttons. You can

select a date from the calendar display by pressing C.

When the “Start date” and the “End date” are different,

set the “End date” later than the “Start date”.

None 1(Schedule type)

You can set a type of the schedule event.

Time

You can set time to start and end the schedule event.

• You cannot set the starting time and the ending time of

one event on different days. For example, if you want to

set the starting time to 22:00 of the starting day and set

the ending time to 9:00 of the following day, you should

set two events, 22:00 to 23:59 on the starting day and

00:00 to 9:00 on the following day.

• Regardless of the number the days till the ending, the

ending time cannot be set earlier than the starting time

of the starting day.

–All day: The schedule event is stored as an all-day

event.

–Set time: You can set time to start and end the

event by selecting the time field. You can enter the

time using Jand dial buttons.

Subject

You can set a subject of the schedule event. You

cannot store the event without entering a subject.

Alarm

You can set whether or not to be notified by an alarm

when the date and time specified in “Start date” and

“Time” come. You can select a melody 1when the alarm

function is set to other than “No alarm”.

• You can select the menu from “Melody” of “Data box”.

>P176

Edit

Add new

2006/12/01 (Fri)

None

Time

Subject

All day

00:00 ~ 23:59

Done

Stationery

191

Stationery

Repeat 2

You can set the repeat setting for the schedule event.

If you do not want to repeat it, select “Once”

1: The content you have set is displayed.

2: If “Start date” and “End date” are different, you can use only

“Once”.

Information

• You can save up to 200 schedules and up to 100 holidays.

• When the specified time of a schedule event setting by alarm

comes, the display to notify it appears.

–C[OK]: After stopping the alarm, you can view the time and

the subject of schedule. If you press Cagain, the alarm will

be released.

–I[Snooze]: You can set the snooze.

• As for the operation of alarm setting during a call or taking a

photo, see “When the Specified Time Comes” (P180).

Checking Schedule Events

From the Stationery menu (P189), “Scheduler”

•13: You can move the year of date.

•79/FE: You can move the month of date.

•5: You can move the cursor to the current date .

•I[Add]: You can add your own schedule.

Go to step 3

on page 190 of “Storing Schedule Events”.

2. Select a date in which a schedule event is stored

•I[Add]: You can add your own schedule.

Go to step 3

on page 190 of “Storing Schedule Events”.

•J

: Displays the schedule of previous and next day.

3. Select a schedule event ] C

Edit Delete

View (20/23)

10 : 00am ~ 11 : 00am

Alarm01.mid

2006/06/01 (Thu)

None

Umbrella

No alarm

Once

The number of schedule events stored

in the date on which the cursor is placed.

The date registered the schedule

is underlined.

Select AddMenu

Tu We Th Fr Sa SuMo

2006 June

DescriptionIcon

Sets the alarm setting

Sets the repeat setting

DescriptionIcon

Start date of schedule

End date of schedule

The type of schedule

Holiday

Alarm

192

Stationery

• For other icons, see page 190.

•C[Edit]: You can edit the selected schedule. Go to

step 3 on page 190 of “Storing Schedule Events”.

•I[Delete]: You can delete the selected schedule.

•J: Displays the previous and next schedule.

Using the Submenus of the Monthly Display

From the monthly display (P191),

[Menu] ]Select

from the following submenu items.

Add new

You can add a new schedule event. See step 2

(P190) of “Storing Schedule Events”.

Open

You can see the details of the schedule events of the

selected date (Daily display).

Set holiday

You can set the selected date to holiday. After

entering the holiday name, press I[Done]. The

setting date is marked in red color on Monthly view.

–On the day: Enter the holiday name and set the

selected date as a holiday.

–Weekly: Enter the holiday name and set the selected

day of the week as a holiday for every week.

–Monthly: Enter the holiday name and set the

selected date as a holiday for every month.

–Annually: Enter the holiday name and set the

selected date as a holiday for every year.

–Duration (2~31): Enter the holiday name and set

the holiday period.

Go to date

The cursor is moved to the specified date. You can

enter a date by pressing Jand dial buttons.

Delete

–Holiday: All the schedule events set as holidays are

deleted.

–Old schedules: All the schedule events stored for

up to the preceding day of the selected date are

deleted.

–Current day schedules: The schedule events of

the selected date are deleted.

–Current week schedules: All the schedule events

of the selected week are deleted.

–Current month schedules: All the schedule events

of the selected month are deleted.

–All schedules: All the schedule events are deleted.

Calendar Type

–Sunday first: Display a calendar with weeks

beginning with Sunday.

–Monday first: Display a calendar with weeks

beginning with Monday.

: You cannot the menu if select the date which you've already set

“Set holiday”.

193

Stationery

Using the Submenus of the Daily Display Screen

1. From the Daily display screen (P191), M[Menu] ]

Select from the following Submenu items

Add new

You can add a new schedule event. See Step 3

(P190) of “Storing Schedule Events”.

Open

The details of the selected schedule event (Display

screen) are displayed.

Edit 1 2

You can edit the selected schedule event. See Step 3

on page 190 of “Storing Schedule Events”.

Set holiday 2

You can set the selected date as a holiday. See

“Holiday settings” of “Using the Submenus of the

Monthly Display Screen” (P192) for the setting items.

Mark/Unmark

You can delete after selecting multiple schedules.

After selecting, press I[Delete].

Go to Date

Displays the schedule you set. You can enter a date

by pressing Jand dial buttons.

Delete

You can delete schedule events.

1: You cannot use this menu when you select the date which is

already set as the holiday by “Set holiday”.

2: You cannot use this menu when you select the daily display of

the date which is already set as the holiday.

Using Memo

C](Stationery) ]2

Creating Memo

You can create and save a memo.

1. From the Stationery menu (P189), “Memo”

• The memo display (See right) appears.

2. I[Add] ]Enter a memo ]C

Viewing Memo

You can view the memo that you created.

1. From the Stationery menu (P189), “Memo”

<Memo>

2. Select a memo to view ]C

•

The screen will be displayed.

Select Add

Memo (1/2)

2006/06/01 (Thu)

Meeting June 1

2006/06/01 (Thu)

Video-phone call

194

Stationery

•C[Edit]: You can edit the displayed memo.

•I[Delete]: You can delete the displayed memo.

•J

: Displays the previous and next memo.

Using the Submenus of the Memo Display/

Display Screen

1. From the Memo display (P193)/Display screen, M

[Menu] ]Select from the following submenu items

Add new

You can create a memo.

Open

You can display the screen of the selected memo.

Edit

You can edit the selected/displayed memo.

Mark/Unmark

You can select and delete multiple memos. After

selecting, press I[Delete].

Delete

You can delete the memo selected or displayed

memo.

: This menu is not displayed in submenus of the displayed screen.

Using Date Search

C](Stationery) ]3

You can search for the number of days (target date) after a

specified period from a specified date. For instance, you can

search for the date after 90 days from the current date for

convenience.

From the Stationery menu (P189), “Date search”

]

Select from the following setting items

•I[Reset]: You can reset all setting values.

From

You can enter a date to start the search. Enter the

date using Jand the dial buttons.

After

You can enter the number of days. Use the dial

buttons to enter the number of days. For instance, if

you want to know the date after 90 days from the

“Start date”, enter 90.

195

Stationery

Using Date Counter

C](Stationery) ]4

If you store the name and date of an event such as a

birthday, you can check how many days remain before

the event or how many days have passed after the event.

Storing Events in Date Counter

1. From the Stationery menu (P189), “Date counter”

• The Date counter display (P187) appears.

2. I[Add] ]Select from the following setting items

]After setting, I[Done]

(Date)

You can set the date of an event. Enter the date using

Jand the dial buttons.

(Memo)

You can enter a memo. You cannot set without

entering.

Displaying Date Counter

1. From the Stationery menu (P189), “Date counter”

I[Add]: You can compose the date counter.

Go to step 2 (See above) of “Storing Events in Date

Counter”.

2. Select a date counter ]C

•C[Edit]: You can edit the selected date counter.

Go to step 2 (P195) of “Storing Events in Date

Counter”.

•I[Delete]: You can delete the selected daily counter.

Edit Delete

View (1/2)

2006/05/31 (Wed)

D-day : -1

Meeting

Select

Menu Add

Date counter (1/2)

Meeting

- 1

2006/05/31

Destination

+16

2006/06/17

– before a number: The number of days

before the specified date

+ before a number: The number of days

after the specified date

196

Stationery

•J: Displays the date counter of previous and next

day.

Using the Submenu of the Date Counter

Display/Display Screen

1. From the Date counter display (P195)/display

screen (P195), M[Menu] ]Select from the

following submenu items

Add new

You can store an event to the date counter. See

Step2 (P195) of “Storing Events in Date Counter”.

Open

You can view the selected date counter.

Edit

You can edit the selected or displayed date counter.

See Step2 of “Storing Events in Date Counter”.

Mark/Unmark

This function is used when you select and delete

multiple date counters. After selecting, press I

[Delete].

Delete

You can delete the selected or displayed date

counter.

: This menu is not displayed in submenus of screen.

197

Available Network Services .................198

Using Voice Mail ...................................198

Using Call Waiting Service...................200

Using Call Forwarding Service.............201

Using Nuisance Call Barring Service...202

Using Caller ID Notification Service ....202

Using Caller ID Request Service..........203

Using Set Arrival Act ............................203

Selecting Arrival Call Act......................203

Setting Remote Control........................204

International Roaming Service.............204

Registering Additional Services...........205

Registering Additional Guidance .........206

Using English Guidance .......................206

Using Service Dialing Number .............207

Using Call Barring.................................207

Network Service

On the Stand-by display, C[Menu] ]

(NW service) or “NW service”

To display the Network service menu

Select

NW service

1 Voice mail

2 Call waiting

3 Call forwarding

4 Nuisance call barring

5 Caller ID notification

6 Caller ID request

7 Set arrival act

Select

NW service

In this manual, the outline of the network service is

explained by the method of using the FOMA

handset menu. For details, refer to “Network

Services User's Guide”.

Available Network Services

With FOMA phone, following DoCoMo Network Services are

available.

• In this manual, the summaries each network service are

explained in the ways using the menu of the FOMA

phone. For detail, see “Mobile Phone User's Guide

[Network services]”.

• This FOMA phone is not applicable to all the services

described in “Mobile Phone User's Guide [Network

services]”.

• Contact “DoCoMo Information Center” on the back of

this manual for application or inquiry.

Information

• The Network Services that are operated by connecting to the

Network Service Center are not available when When “ ” is

displayed on your handset.

• You can register newly provided network services when

additionally provided by DoCoMo. >P205

Using Voice Mail

C](NW Service) ]1

When you are in an area where radio waves do not reach,

when you turn off the FOMA phone or when you cannot

answer the call, this service answers to the party who

made a voice/video-phone call to you, and the Voice Mail

Center holds voice mail messages for you.

•

When you did not answer a voice call or video-phone call

that came in while Voice Mail is activated, it is recorded to

the received call history as a missed call and a screen

notifying a missed call appears.

•

This handset is not applicable to Voice Mail (Video-phone

call). Make a voice call to “1412” (free) and set not to be

applicable to video-phone call.

198

Network Service

Service

Reference

Monthly feeApplication

Voice Mail

See right

ChargedRequired

Call Waiting Service P200ChargedRequired

Call Forwarding Service

P201FreeRequired

Nuisance Call Barring Service

P202FreeRequired

P203Free

Not required

Caller ID Notification Service

P202Free

Not required

Remote control

Not required

Free P204

International roaming service Not required

Free P204

English Guidance

Not required

Free P206

Service Dialing Number

Not required

Free P207

Caller ID Request Service

Public mode (power off)

Not required

Free P54

Public mode (drive mode)

Not required

Free P51

199

Network Service

•

If a call comes in from a caller not notifying caller ID with

“Caller ID request” activated, the Caller ID Request

guidance is played back and the center will not hold

voice mail messages.

1. From the Network Service menu (P197), “Voice

mail” ]Select from the following setting items

Activate voice mail

You can start using Voice Mail.

Set ringing time

You can set the time from the first ring until the call is

connected to the Voice Mail Service Center. (period)

Deactivate voice mail

You can stop using Voice Mail.

Voice mail status request

You can check the current settings of Voice Mail

Service. If you press M[Menu], you can start/stop the

service of voice mail or set the length of ringing time.

Play messages

You can play back recorded Voice Mail messages.

Voice mail setting

You can connect to the Voice Mail Service Center to

change the settings of Voice Mail by following the

voice guidance.

Check messages

You can check whether or not new messages are

recorded.

Notify missed call

If the FOMA phone is turned off or out of the service

area, you are informed by SMS (Short Message Service)

of missed calls when the FOMA phone is turned on or in

the service area again.

–Activate missed call notification: You can start

using Missed Call Notice Service.

–Deactivate missed call notification: You can

stop using Missed Call Notice Service.

–Missed call notification status request: You can

check the settings of the Missed Call Notice Service.

Delete voice mail icon

You can delete displayed in the icon view area.

Set message alert ringer

You can set the ring tone to sound when a new

message is recorded.

200

Network Service

Using Call Waiting Service

C](NW Service) ]2

When you receive another voice call during a call, you will

be notified of it by busy ring tone, and you can put the

current call on hold to answer the new call. You can also

newly make a call to another party by putting the current

call on hold.

• To use Call Waiting Service, set “Arrival Call Act” (P203)

to “Answer” beforehand. If this is set to another setting,

you cannot answer the incoming voice call while you are

performing a voice call even if you start Call Waiting

Service.

• When using Call Waiting, set “Arrival call act” to

“Answer”. >P203

•

If a call comes in from a caller not notifying caller ID while

Caller ID Request Service is set to “Activate caller ID

Request”, the Caller ID Request guidance is played back

and Call Waiting is not available.

• When a video-phone call comes in during a voice call, or

a voice call comes in during a video-phone call, Call

Waiting does not work. The second call is recorded as a

missed call in Received Calls.

1. From the Network Service menu (P197), “Call

waiting” ]Select from the following setting items

Activate call waiting

You can start using Call Waiting.

Deactivate call waiting

You can stop using Call Waiting.

Call waiting status request

You can check whether the Call Waiting is activated

or deactivated.

Submenus on using Call Waiting Service

• Press to view the submenu.

aWhen a new call comes in during a call

Voice mail 1

When a new call comes in, the caller can connect the

voice mail center.

Call rejection

You can reject a call without receiving.

Call forwarding 2

You can forward the incoming call to the forwarding

destination you have registered beforehand.

End active call

You can answer a new call after disconnecting the

current call.

Mute/Unmute

The voice to send to the other party is set to mute or

unmute.

1: You can use the voice mail when you have signed up this

service. See “Using Voice Mail” (P198) for details.

2: You can use the call forwarding service only when you have

signed up this service. See “Using Call Forwarding Service” on

the next page.

201

Network Service

aWhen you are talking with a party while a call to

another party is put on hold (Multi call).

Switch

Put the current call on hold to enable talking with

another party on hold.

End

–End active call: After ending a call, you can take

the new call on hold.

–End held call: You can end a call on hold.

–End all calls: You can end both calls.

Mute/Unmute

The voice to send to the other party is set to mute or

unmute.

Using Call Forwarding Service

C](NW Service) ]3

This is a service to forward a voice call/video-phone call

when you are in an area where radio waves do not reach,

you turn off the handset or you did not answer within the

set ring time.

•

When you did not answer a voice call or video-phone

call that came in while Call Forwarding Service is

activated, it is recorded to the received call history as a

missed call and a screen notifying a missed call appears.

•

If a call comes in from a caller not notifying caller ID while

Caller ID Request Service is set to “Activate caller ID

Request”, the Caller ID Request guidance is played back

and the call is not forwarded.

• Call Forwarding Service will be automatically deactivated

if “Voice Mail” is set to “Activate Voice mail”.

• This service is not available with some billing plans.

1. From the Network Service menu (P197), “Call

forwarding” ]Select from the following setting

items

Activate call forwarding

You can start using Call forwarding Service.

–Register fwd number: You can register the phone

number of the forwarding destination. If you press

M[Search], you can search for phonebook.

–Set ringing time: You can set the time from the

first ring until the call is forwarded.

Deactivate call forwarding

You can stop using Call forwarding Service.

You can change the phone number of the forwarding

destination. If you press M[Search], you can search

for phonebook.

Setting at forwarded party busy

You can set an incoming call to be connected to the

Voice Mail Service Center if the forwarded destination

is busy.

Call forwarding status request

You can check the current setting status of Call

Forwarding Service.

202

Network Service

Setting to enable or disable call forwarding guidance

Press 1429A.

• Make settings following the voice guidance.

• For details, see “Mobile Phone User's [Network

services]”.

Using Nuisance Call Barring Service

C](NW Service) ]4

This is a service to reject "Nuisance calls" such as prank

calls. If you register a caller to reject, calls from the caller

will be automatically rejected and the caller will be

answered by the guidance.

• Even if a call from a caller who is registered to be

rejected, the ring tone will not sound, and the call will not

be recorded in the received call history.

1. From the Network Service menu (P197),

“Nuisance call barring” ]Select from the

following setting items

You can register the phone number of the call that

you answered the last for rejection.

Delete all entries

All the phone numbers registered for rejection are

deleted.

Delete most recent entry

You can delete the phone number registered last for

rejection.

Using Caller ID Notification Service

C](NW Service) ]5

You can notify your phone number to the other party

when making a call. When the other party's phone is the

digital terminal that supports caller ID, your phone number

appears on the other party’s phone.

• Your caller ID is important information, so take great

care to notify it.

1. From the Network Service menu (P197), “Caller ID

notification” ]Select from the following setting

items

Activate/Deactivate caller ID notification

You can display your phone number on the other

party's phone (display) when making a call. To use

this service, enter the Network Security Code.

Caller ID notification status request

You can check the current setting status of Caller ID

Notification.

203

Network Service

Using Caller ID Request Service

C](NW Service) ]6

This is a service to request for the Caller ID notification by

guidance to the call from the party who does not notify

Caller ID, and terminate the call.

• A call that was not answered by Caller ID Request

Service will not be recorded in the received call history,

and the screen notifying of the missed call does not

appear.

1. From the Network Service menu (P197), Caller ID

request” ]Select from the following setting items

Activate caller ID request

You can start using Caller ID Request Service.

Deactivate caller ID request

You can stop using Caller ID Request Service.

Caller ID request status request

You can check the current settings of Caller ID

Request Service.

Using Set Arrival Act

C](NW Service) ]7

You can activate or cancel the arrival call act set by

“Selecting Arrival Call Act” (See right). You can view the

current settings.

1. From the Network Service menu (P197), “Set arrival

act” ]Select from the following setting items

Activate arrival act

You can start using the response you set in “Arrival

Call Act”.

Deactivate arrival act

You can stop using the response you set in “Arrival

Call Act”.

Arrival act status request

You can check the current settings of Set Arrival Act.

Selecting Arrival Call Act

C](NW Service) ]8

You can set how to react to a voice call/video-phone call

that comes to a customer who has subscribed to “Voice

Mail”, “Call Forwarding Service” or “Call Waiting Service”

while performing a call.

• If you have not subscribed to “Voice Mail”, “Call

Forwarding Service” or “Call Waiting Service”, you

cannot answer a call while performing a call.

• To use arrival act, set “Set arrival act” to “Activate arrival

act”.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P237

204

Network Service

1. From the Network Service menu (P197), “Arrival

call act” ]Select from the following setting items

Answer

The phone rings. If Voice Mail, Call Waiting Service, or

Call Forwarding Service is activated, the phone

follows each setting.

Voice mail

Connects incoming calls to Voice Mail. Even if Call

Waiting Service is activated, the calls are connected

to Voice Mail.

Call forwarding

Forwards incoming calls to the forwarding phone

number registered. Even if Call Waiting Service or

Voice Mail is activated, the calls are forwarded.

Call rejection

Rejects incoming calls.

Setting Remote Control

C](NW Service) ]9

This service allows you to operate “Voice Mail” or “Call

Forwarding Service” from touch-tone phones, public

phones or DoCoMo's cellular phones.

• To use “Voice Mail” or “Call Forwarding Service”

overseas, you need to set “Remote control” to “Activate

remote control” beforehand.

1. Select “Remote control” from Network Service

menu (P197) ]Select one of the following items to

be set

Activate remote control

Start remote control.

Deactivate remote control

Stop remote control.

Remote control status request

Check settings for remote control.

International Roaming Service

C](NW Service) ]0

This service allows you to use functions such as Voice

Mail and Call Forwarding Service while you stay overseas.

1. Select “International service” from NW service

menu (P197) ]Select one of the following items to

be set

Voice mail (Int.)

- Activate voice mail: Start Voice Mail.

- Deactivate voice mail: Stop Voice Mail.

- Play messages: Play recorded voice message.

- Voice mail setting: Check current settings of Voice

Mail.

205

Network Service

Call forwarding (Int.)

- Activate call forwarding: Start Call Forwarding

Service.

- Deactivate call forwarding: Stop Call Forwarding

Service.

Roaming guidance (Int.)

Set roaming guidance.

Registering Additional Services

C](NW Service) ]*1

When a new network service is added by DoCoMo, you

can register the service to the menu and use.

1. From the Network Service menu (P197), “Others”

]“Additional service”

• The additional service list will be displayed.

2. I[Edit] ]After editing, press C[Select]

USSD code

Enter the service code (USSD) supplied by DoCoMo.

Service name

Enter any service name. Press I[Edit] to edit.

Using the Submenu of the Additional Service

List Screen

1. From the Additional Service List screen,

M[Menu] ]Select from the following submenu

items

Edit

Edit a service.

Select

The selected service is performed.

Delete 1 item

The selected service is deleted.

Delete all

All the registered services are deleted.

: Not displayed if an unregistered service is selected.

Using Registered Services

1. From the Additional Service List screen, select a

registered service ]C

206

Network Service

Registering Additional Guidance

C](NW Service) ]*2

When you perform services added by “Additional Service”,

you can register reply messages that correspond to the

codes (USSD) returned from the Service Center. The reply

message is displayed when the registered code is

returned as a reply.

1. From the Network Service menu (P197), “Others”

]“Additional guidance”

• The reply message list will be displayed.

2. I[Edit] ]After setting, press C[OK]

USSD code

Enter the service code (USSD) supplied by DoCoMo.

Reply message

Enter a reply message name. Press I[Edit] to edit.

Using the Submenu of the Reply Message

List Screen

1. From the Reply Message List screen, M[Menu]

]Select from the following Submenu items

Edit

You can set a reply message.

Delete 1 item

The selected reply message is deleted.

Delete all

The all registered reply messages are deleted.

: Not displayed if an unregistered service is selected.

Using English Guidance

C](NW Service) ]*3

You can set the guidance of setting network services such

as “Voice Mail” or voice guidance such as “out of the

service area” to English.

Available Languages

LanguageSetting

Japanese

Plays back the guidance in Japanese.

Plays back the guidance in English.

First plays back the guidance in

Japanese and then in English.

First plays back the guidance in

English and then in Japanese.

English

Japanese +

English

English +

Japanese

207

Network Service

1. From the Network Service menu (P197), “Others”

]“English guidance” ]Select from the following

setting items

Guidance setting

–Outgoing + Incoming call: You can set languages

of the guidance for outgoing and incoming calls.

Select “Yes” and then select a language.

–Outgoing call: You can set a language of the

guidance only for outgoing calls. Select “Yes” and

then select a language.

–Incoming call: You can set a language of the

guidance only for incoming calls. Select “Yes” and

then select a language.

Guidance status request

You can check the current settings of the guidance.

Using Service Dialing Number

C](NW Service) ]*4

You can make a call to DoCoMo Information Center or

DoCoMo repair counter.

• The displayed item may differ or some items may not be

displayed depending on the FOMA card.

1. From the Network Service menu (P197), “Others”

]“Service dialing number” ]Select from the

following items

(DoCoMo Malfunction

information)

Connect to the DoCoMo repair counter.

(General information)

Connect to the DoCoMo Information Center.

Using Call Barring

C](NW Service) ]*5

You can block all incoming calls while you are roaming

outside Japan with the FOMA phone.

1. From the Network Service menu (P197), “Others”

]“Call barring” ]Select from the following

setting items

Activate barring of incoming call - roam

–Barring all incoming calls: All incoming calls are

restricted. Enter your Network Security Code.

–Data calls barring: Only incoming video-phone

calls are restricted. Enter your Network Security

Code.

Deactivate barring of incoming call - roam

You can stop using Barring All Incoming When Roam.

Enter your Network Security Code.

Barring of incoming call - roam status request

You can check the settings of Barring All Incoming

When Roam.

209

Data Transmission Available from

the FOMA phone ..................................210

Before Use............................................211

Glossary of Data Transmission

Terms ....................................................212

Preparation Flow for Data

Transmission ........................................213

AT command ........................................213

Data Transmission

As for data transmissions, refer to Manual for data

transmission in CD-ROM for details. To read this

manual, it is recommended to set up Adobe Reader

(Over Ver 6.0). If this program is not installed in your

personal computer yet, install it from the attached

CD-ROM to read the manual. For details, see the

Help of Adobe Reader.

Data Transmission Available from the

FOMA phone

The data transmission services you can use by connecting

the FOMA phone to a personal computer are classified as

follows: packet transmission, and data transfer (OBEX).

• This FOMA handset does not support 64K data

transmission.

•

This FOMA handset is not applicable with Remote Wakeup.

•

This FOMA handset does not support FAX transmission.

•

This FOMA phone is applicable only to packet

transmission through IP connection (mopera U, etc.). It is

not applicable to packet transmission through PPP

connection.

Types of Available Transmission

Packet Transmission

This service charges a transmission fee according to the

amount of data you sent and received. The packet

transmission is suitable for sending and receiving data

only when data transmission is required, with a device

always connected to the network. This service is provided

by best effort that the communication speed varies

depending on the communication environment and traffic

of the network.

It uses an access point which supports FOMA packet

transmission such as “mopera U”, an Internet connection

service for FOMA, and allows data transmission at a

maximum rate of 384kbps in downloading and 64kbps in

uploading.

FOMA L602i allows data transmission overseas using an

access point compatible with W-CDMA or GPRS packet

transmission.

• Note that uploading and downloading a massive

amount of data results in a high amount of

communication fee.

Data Transfer (OBEX)

This service transfers data using infrared rays. This data

transfer service is not chargeable.

By infrared communication, you can exchange data with

another FOMA phone or a device having the infrared

communication function such as a personal computer.

Notes for Using Data Transmission

Charges of Internet service provider

To use the internet, you need to pay the charge for the

Internet service provider you use (referred to as “provider”

in this document).

Besides the FOMA service fee, you need to pay the

charge directly to the Internet service provider.

For details on the charges, contact the Internet service

provider.

You can use the DoCoMo Internet service, “mopera U”.

To use “mopera U”, subscription (charged) is required.

210

Data Transmission

211

Data Transmission

Setting access point (Internet service provider, etc.)

To use the packet transmission, connect to an access

point for packet transmission.

• You cannot connect to the DoPa access point.

• You cannot connect to PHS 64K or 32K data

transmission access point such as PIAFS.

About user authentication for accessing network

User certification (ID and password) may be required at

connection to some access points. In this case, enter your ID

and password on the transmission software (dial-up

network). An ID and a password are given from a connecting

provider or a network administrator of the connecting access

point. Consult your Internet service provider or network

administrator for details of the ID and password.

Conditions for packet transmission

To perform the transmission using the FOMA phone by

connecting to a personal computer, the following

conditions are required. Even when these conditions are

satisfied, however, if the base station is congested or the

radio wave conditions are bad, you may not be able to

perform transmission.

• The personal computer to be used should support the

FOMA USB cable (option).

• Within FOMA service area.

• The access point supports IP access of packet

transmission (PDP type) of the FOMA.

Before Use

Operating Environments

The following operating environments are applicable to a

personal computer used for data transmission:

1: DoCoMo does not assure the operation from the OS upgrade.

2: Required memory and hard disk space depends on system

configuration of a PC.

Information

• Purchase the dedicated FOMA USB Cable (option). The USB

cable for personal computer cannot be used because the

shape of the connector differs.

Requirements

• PC-AT compatible PC with CD-

ROM drive.

• USB port (USB Specification

Rev1.1/2.0 compliant)

• Display resolution 800X600 dots,

High Color (65,536 colors) or higher

recommended.

Item

PC unit

Hard disk space

Required memory

Windows XP, Windows 2000,

(All Japanese editions)

• Windows XP: 128M bytes or more 2

• Windows 2000: 64M bytes or more 2

OS 1

Free space of 5M bytes or more 2

212

Data Transmission

Glossary of Data Transmission Terms

aAPN

An abbreviation for Access Point Name. Used to

identify an Internet service provider or Internet LAN

system you access for packet transmission.

For example, “mopera U” is expressed with character

string “mopera.net” in APN.

acid

An abbreviation for Context Identifier. A registration

number of the APN that is registered in the FOMA

phone beforehand for packet transmission.

In the FOMA phones, you can register up to 10 cid

numbers (1 to 10).

aDNS

An abbreviation for Domain Name System, which

converts a name easy-to-understand for human-being.

For example, a domain name “mopera.net” is

converted into an address indicated by a number easy-

to-manage for computer.

aPDP type

An abbreviation for Packet Data Protocol, which

indicates packet transmission. Usually, the type

provider indicates will be selected from PPP access

point and IP access point.This FOMA phone supports

IP access service. For PDP type, consult provider or

network service.

aQoS

An abbreviation for Quality of Service, which indicates

the quality of network service. For the QoS setting of

the FOMA phone, you can specify a communication

speed.

: Connection speed may vary depending on

communicating conditions, etc.

aW-TCP

A TCP parameter used to maximize the TCP/IP

transmission capability when performing the packet

transmission in the FOMA network. To maximize the

transmission performance of the FOMA phone, you

need to optimize the TCP parameter.

aPC Administrator right

Means the right with which the user can access all

functions of Windows XP and Windows 2000 systems.

A user without an administrator right

cannot install/uninstall transmission setup files (drivers)

and FOMA PC setup software, etc.

Data Transmission

213

Data Transmission

Preparation Flow for Data Transmission

The following outline shows a preparation flow for packet

transmission, and data transfer by connecting a FOMA

phone to a personal computer.

Transmission setup files and FOMA PC setup

software

Attached FOMA L602i CD-ROM contains the transmission

setup files (drivers) and FOMA PC setup software.

• The L602i transmission setup files are software (drivers)

required for packet transmission, and data transfer

using the FOMA USB Cable (option).

• The FOMA PC setup software can setup access points

(APN) for packet transmission and dial-up settings

easily.

AT command

AT commands are used to specify and modify the

functions of the FOMA phone on the personal computer.

FOMA phone is in conformity with AT commands.

For details, refer to “Data Transmission” in attached FOMA

L602i CD-ROM.

Data Transmission

Packet transmission

Data transfer (OBEX)

Infrared communication

Install L602i transfer setup file

onto a personal computer

Specify a connecting access point

Data transfer (OBEX)

Using FOMA PC

setup software

Not using FOMA PC

setup software

Using infrared

communication > P182

Establish connection

215

Entering Characters ............................ 216

List of Character Assignment of

Dial Buttons ......................................... 222

Entering Characters

216

Entering Characters

About Character Entry Display

FOMA phone has some functions to enter characters for

phonebook or mail.

On the Character Entry display, information on the current

input mode or operation guidance is displayed.

1Remaining number of bytes: Remaining number of

characters you can enter is displayed in bytes.

2Operation guidance field: Full-pitch and half-pitch are

displayed.

3Input mode field: Input mode is displayed.

Setting the prediction conversion to enter

character

You can set ON/OFF to predict the conversion candidates

(P217) on entering Hiragana.

• This method is set to “ON” at purchase.

1. From the Character Entry display, M[Menu] ]

“Input setting” ]“Prediction ON/OFF”

2. ON/OFF

Switching Input Mode

1. Press I[i-mode] on the Character Entry display

(See left)

• Each time you press I[i-mode], the input mode

switches.

“” ... You can enter Kanji and Hiragana.

“” ... You can enter Katakana.

“”…You can enter Alphabets.

: Indicates that you can enter the capital letters.

“”…You can enter Numerals.

Switching Between Full-pitch/Half-pitch

• You may not be able to switch between full/half-pitch

depending on the display of character entry.

1. Press Aon the Full Entry display (See left)

217

Entering Characters

• Each time you press A, the full-pitch and half-pitch

modes switch.

Switching Pictograph/Symbol/Emoticon Mode

• You cannot switch the mode depending on the display

of character entry.

1. Press Ton the Character Entry display (P216)

• Each time you press T, the input mode switches.

“” ... You can enter pictographs.

“” ... You can enter full-pitch Symbols.

“” ... You can enter half-pitch Symbols.

“” ... You can enter emoticons.

–I[Continue]: You can enter characters after

selecting multiple. After selecting them, press I

[Set].

–A: You can change the page. If you select “

”, the cursor will be jumped.

Entering Characters

You can enter characters by pressing dial buttons to

which desired characters are assigned.

•To allocate the character on each button, refer to “List of

Character Assignment of Dial Buttons” (P222).

Entering Characters in Prediction mode

• You can use this method on setting “ ” of Hiragana

mode.

1. Enter characters on the Character Entry display

(P216)

•M[KanaA1]: The entered characters are converted

to Katakana or Numerals.

•I[Conv]: The entered characters are converted to

Kanji or other characters.

•C: The entered characters are finalized.

2. Move the cursor to Prediction/Conversion area

using H.

3. Select a character to convert ]C

Entering Characters in Normal mode

When entering the characters in other than “Hiragana

mode ( )”, the conversion (after step 2) is not required.

1. On Character Entry display (P216), enter characters

•M[Katakana/ Numeral] : You can convert the

characters on inputting to Katakana or number.

218

Entering Characters

•C[Set] : You can confirm the character on

inputting.

: In Hiragana mode

2. D/I[Convert]

3. Move the cursor by pressing Hto the area of

conversion candidates.

4. Select the character to convert. ]C

aSwitching Upper / Lower Character Mode

To switch upper / lower characters, press *several

times after entering characters. If the character is not

correspond with each one, you cannot convert it.

• You cannot convert the character in numeral mode

(“1(12)”).

aEntering Voiced / Semivoiced Marks

After entering the character, press Aseveral times.

However, you cannot enter a full-pitch character if it

does not correspond to a half-pitch character.

• You cannot enter it in alphabet (“a(ab/AB)”) or numeral

(“1(12)”) mode.

aEntering a Punctuation

Press *several times.

• You cannot enter it in alphabet (“a(ab/AB)”) or numeral

(“1(12)”) mode.

aEntering Line Feed

Press #/D

• Press Din numeral mode (“1(12)” a line feed).

aEntering a Space

M[Menu] >“Special input” >Select “Space”. In case

of being the cursor at the middle of sentence, press R

to enter a space.

aDeleting a Character

Move the cursor to the character to delete and press

Q. If the cursor is at the end of a character, press

Qonce to delete the character left of the cursor.

And, press Qfor more than 1 seconds to delete all

the characters.

Using the Submenu on the Character Entry

Display

• A few menus may not be activated depending on the

display of character entry.

From the Character Entry display (P216), M[Menu]

]Select from the following Submenu items.

Common phrases

–Input common phrase: You can select and enter

the registered common phrases.

–Edit common phrase: You can create and register

common phrases and edit registered common

phrases. Go to step 2 in “Editing Common Phrases”

(P220).

Edit character

You can specify a range to copy/cut and paste

characters. Go to “Copying/Cutting/Pasting” (P219).

219

Entering Characters

Edit word

You can register words. Go to step 2 (P221) of

“Registering Words”.

Quote

–Phonebook: You can access a Phonebook entry

and quote the registered contents. Go to step 3 on

page 66 of “Searching Phonebook”.

–Own number: You can bring up your own number

and quote the registered contents.

Input setting

–Full/Half: You can switch between full-pitch and

half-pitch.

–Upper/Lower :You can switch between upper

case and lower case of Alphabets (a/A (ab/AB)).

–Prediction ON/OFF: You can activate/deactivate

the Prediction and Conversion function.

Special input

–Changing line: You can start a new line.

–Space: You can enter a space before the cursor.

–Kuten code: You can enter characters using the

Kuten code. Go to step 2 of “Entering Characters

Using Kuten Code” (See right).

: After converting the English mode “a(ab/AB)”, you can activate

the menu. You cannot use this menu in other modes.

Entering Characters Using Kuten Code

You can enter characters or symbols using the 4-digit

Kuten code.

• For details, see “Kuten code list” (P269).

1. From the Character Entry display (P216), M

[Menu] ]“Special input” ]“Kuten code”

2. Enter a Kuten code using the numeric buttons ]

• You can also select characters or symbols using K.

Copying/Cutting/Pasting

You can copy or cut a character string and paste it to

another display/position.

1. From the Character Entry display (P216), M

[Menu] ]“Edit character” ]“Copy”/“Cut”

2. Move the cursor to the start position using K]

3. Move the cursor to the end position using K]

4. Display the Character Entry display to which you

want to paste the copied/cut characters ]Move

the cursor to the desired position for pasting

using K.

5. M[Menu] ]“Edit character” ]“Paste” ]“Yes”

• Select M[Menu] ]“Edit character” ]“Undo” in

sequence to undo cut or pasted characters.

Information

• If the number of characters which are copied or cut from the

sentence exceeds the limit, you can paste them after deleting

the characters over the limit.

220

Entering Characters

• To paste the character after copying or cutting, its type should

be same. For example, you cannot enter (half pitch of

Alphabet and numeral) Hiragana or Kanji in screen to input

mail address.

• If you paste character lines including a line feed in the entry

screen that line feeds cannot be entered, it is replaced by a

blank (half-pitch space).

Editing Common Phrases

You can edit registered common phrases or add new

common phrases.

1. From the Character Entry display (P216), M

[Menu] ]“Common phrases” ]“Edit common

phrase”

2. Select Category ]C

• The Select Common phrase display appears.

• If you press Cin common phrase list, you can view

all categories.

• If you register new phrase, select “Original”.

3. Select a common phrase to be changed ]I[Edit]

]Edit/input the common phrase ]C

Using the Submenus of the Edit Common

Phrase Display/ Select Common Phrase

Display / Input Common Phrase Display

From the Edit Common Phrase display / Common

Phrase display,

[Menu]

]

Select from the following

Submenu items

Reset all 1

All common phrases are reset to their defaults.

Delete 1 item 2

A selected/displayed common phrase is deleted.

Reset 1 item 2

A selected/displayed common phrase is reset to its

default.

Category reset 2

All common phrases stored in the category are reset

to their defaults.

Cancel

You can cancel editing of common phrases.

1: Not displayed on the submenu of the common phrase display.

2: Not displayed on the submenu of the Edit common phrase

display.

SelectMenu

Edit common phrase

2 Greeting

3 Business

4 Private

5 Reply

6 Pictograph idiom

7 Original

1 Internet

221

Entering Characters

Information

• If you activate the menu “Reset all”, the contents of “Original”

will be deleted.

Registering Words

For those words not displayed as the conversion

candidates or words with unusual readings, you can

words are displayed as conversion candidates when their

readings are entered.

1. From the Character Entry display (P216), M

[Menu] ]“Edit word”

• The registered Words List is displayed.

• Select a dictionary and press Cto confirm the

registered words.

2. I[New registration] ]Select the next item to

following

Reading

You can set reading of “Word”.

Word

You can set a word that will be displayed as a

conversion candidate when you enter characters

registered as “Reading”.

Deleting Words

1. From the Registered Words list, M[Menu] ]

“Delete 1 item”/“Delete all” ]“Yes”

222

Entering Characters

List of Character Assignment of Dial Buttons

You can enter a character by pressing dial button. On pressing each button, you can enter multiple characters as follow the

table below. Each time you press the button, the character will be changed. Each time you press #, the character will be

changed in reverse order.

1: In full-pitch mode, “ ” or “ ” is displayed only when the character to which “ ” or “ ” can be added is displayed.

2: You can enter a character only in full-pitch mode. 3: In half-pitch mode, “ ~ ” is displayed. 4: You can enter a character only in half-pitch mode.

5: If you set capital mode in “Switching Capital/Small letter mode” (P219), the capital letter will be displayed at first.

223

International Roaming Service ........... 224

Setting the Network Mode.................. 225

Confirming Before Using Overseas.... 225

Using the FOMA Phone Overseas...... 227

Overseas Use

224

Overseas Use

International Roaming Service

International roaming service (WORLD WING) is a service

that allows you to make calls or communications overseas

using the same phone number as that used in Japan,

utilizing networks of affiliate telecommunications carriers

overseas. Refer to “Network Services User's Guide

(Chapter of International Service)” for details of the

communications services available while in international

roaming. The International Service web page of DoCoMo

offers the downloadable latest version of “Network

Services User's Guide (Chapter of International Service)”

as well as the latest information about WORLD SERVICE:

http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/service/world/

Application for WORLD WING

• The customer who subscribed to the service on or after

September 1, 2005 is not required to apply to this

service. However, the customer who declined this

service at subscription to the FOMA service is required

to apply.

• The customer who subscribed to the FOMA service on

and before August 31, 2005 and has not applied to the

“WORLD WING” is required to apply to this service.

• This service is not available with some billing plans.

Overseas Networks and Services Available

Services marked with “O” in the table above may not

be available depending on the mobile phone carrier

being used or the place of stay.

See the International Service web page of DoCoMo for

details about services available in each country or region

http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/service/world/

Information

• You can set to display Japan time together with the local time

on the stand-by display. >P81

See “Network Name” (P98)

to display the network

name on connecting and

to set it.

Overseas Use

Network

Icon

Voice

Packet

transmission

(i-mode,

mopera U, etc.)

SMS

Video-

phone

GPRS

GSM

225

Overseas Use

Setting the Network Mode

C](Settings) ]52

Network mode of the FOMA phone is set to “Auto” at

purchase. If you know the network in your area, you can

select it directly.

Setting item/Setting at purchase >P251

1. From the Settings menu (P85), “Network” ]

“Network mode” ]Select from the following

setting items

Auto

Searches all the networks connectable.

WCDMA only

Searches only networks supporting 3G.

GSM only

Searches only networks supporting GSM/GPRS.

For the network search setting (changing of the

communication carriers), see P96.

Information

• You cannot exchange the data through packet service under

GSM network.

• When using the FOMA handset in Japan or in the service area

of 3G network, we recommend you change the setting of the

“Network mode” to “WCDMA only” to save battery power.

Confirming Before Using Overseas

Before Departure

Charging the Battery

Make sure of the voltage available in the country or area of

stay and use the FOMA Overseas/Domestic AC Adaptor 01

(option) for overseas and domestic usage (a conversion

plug adapter according to the place of stay will be required).

And, do not charge the FOMA phone using an electrical

transformer for overseas travel.

Using Voice Mail/Call Forwarding from Overseas

Use of the Voice Mail or Call Forwarding service from

overseas is part of “remote operation” and requires the

activation of Remote operation before your departure. For

details to set the remote operations, refer to “Remote

Opeartion Settings” (P204).

Before departure, make sure that you have the Network

Security Code, which may be required for remote-

accessing the Voice Mail etc. If you have forget your

Network Security Code, visit a DoCoMo Shop or

DoCoMo World Counter with an identification such as

the driver’s license to make necessary changes.

Using i-mode Overseas

To use i-mode overseas, you need to set “International

Settings” to “YES”.

aTo change settings in Japan

• No packet transmission fees apply.

“iMenu” ]“English” ]“Options” ]“International

Settings” ]“YES”

aTo change settings outside Japan

Packet transmission fees apply.

“iMenu” ]“International Settings” ]“YES”

•

If set to “NO”, you can send and receive i-mode mail

messages and view the i Menu only. The setting at

purchase is “NO”.

Some i-mode sites may not be available depending on

the information provider.

Packet transmission fees apply to all types of access

from overseas including transmissions that are free of

charge in Japan.

Japan time applies even if i-mode sites are accessed

from overseas. Be careful when registering entries to or

deleting entries from My Menu at the beginning or end

of a month.

Using FOMA phone overseas

Setting Mobile Phone Carrier

The network will be set after searching it automatically if

“Setting the Network Mode” (P97) is set to “Auto” in

international roaming.

• You can set up beforehand the type of network on

searching by “Setting the Network Mode” (P97).

• If you search the network automatically, you can set the

preferred network by “Registering a Network from the

list” (P97).

• You can select the network manually. Refer to “Selecting

the Network Connection Mode” (P96).

Information

• “Network mode” is set to “Auto” after you search with

“Network mode” set to “WCDMA only” or “GSM only” and

“Network selection” set to “Auto”, “Network mode” will be set

to “Auto” after searching.

• If you search with “Network mode” set to “Auto” and “Network

selection” set to “Auto”, the same mode (“WCDMA only” /

“GSM only”) of the network (communication carrier) you

selected after searching will be set.

226

Overseas Use

Settings to be made after returning to Japan

After Coming Back to Japan

When network settings have been changed for use

overseas, “ ” may appear in Japan.

In that case, make settings given below.

• You have to set “Network selection” (P97) to

“Auto/WCDMA only”.

• You have to set “Network selection” (P96) to “Auto” or

“Manual” and select “JP DoCoMo-3G” on the network

selection screen displayed after searching.

Using the FOMA Phone Overseas

•

If the other party subscribes to a mobile phone carrier

supporting the FOMA video-phone, you can make a

video-phone call by pressing T.

Making Calls

aMaking a call to Japan from the country you stay

When entering the phone number directly

Press 0for 1 or more seconds to display “+”

]81(Country code for Japan) ]Other party’s

phone number excluding “0 (zero)” at the beginning

of the area code ]A(T)

Example: When the other party is in one of the 23

wards of Tokyo (area code: 03)

“+”>81> 3> XXXX – XXXX

Making a call to a number registered in phonebook

The phonebook list screen (P67) or M[Menu] on

phonebook detail screen (P67) ]“International call

(Japan)” ]C[Call] when recipient's phone number

appears

Example: When a phone number saved in phonebook

has area code “03” (in 23 ward of Tokyo)

+813XXXX - XXXX

• A recipient's phone number is generated,

automatically prefixed with Japan's Cuontry code

“+81” and “0” removed from area code.

aCalling another WORLD WING/WORLD WALKER user

Press 0for 1 or more seconds to display “+”

]81(Country code for Japan) ]Other

party’s phone number excluding “0 (zero)” at the

beginning of the area code ]A(T)

Example: When the other party has a mobile phone

number beginning with (090)

“+” > 81 > 90 >XXXX –

XXXX

aCalling a mobile phone or fixed-line phone within the

country of stay

Dial the other party’s phone number including the

area code

]

A(T)

227

Overseas Use

228

Overseas Use

Calling from the country of stay to a mobile phone or

fixed-line phone in another country (except for Japan)

• In some countries or areas such as Italy, “0” may be

required.

Press 0for 1 or more seconds to display “+”

]

Country code of the other party

]

Other party’s

phone number excluding “0 (zero)” at the beginning of

the area code

]

A(T)

Receiving calls

When a call comes in, A(T)

Having Others Call You

aReceiving a call from Japan

Have the other party call you at your mobile phone

number as usual.

090

XXXX – XXXX/

080

XXXX – XXXX

]

CALL

aReceiving a call from a country other than Japan

International access code of the country where you

make the call ]81 (Country code for Japan)

]Your phone number excluding “0 (zero)” at the

beginning ]CALL

Troubleshooting

Unable to Make or Receive Calls/Always Out of the

Service Area/Handset Does Not Turn ON

Possible causes for inability to make or receive calls,

reception level indication permanently being “Out of the

service area” or the handset not turning on are as follows:

• Weak radio waves being received or being out of the

service area

• Failure of the local switchboard or base station or

temporary line congestion

• Wrong operation of the handset

• Others

See the International Service web page of DoCoMo for the

latest information about service areas and network

interruption:

In addition, make sure of the operation and try the following:

• If you are indoors, confirm if the condition is the same

outdoors.

• Confirm if your monthly charges have not exceeded the

limit.

• Turn OFF the handset once and back ON.

• Manually select the mobile phone carrier to use.

If the problem persists after the above troubleshooting

procedures are taken, contact the Network Technical

Support and Operations Center (P229).

If i-mode is inaccessible

• If i-mode sites other than “iMenu” is unavailable, first

make “International Settings” (P225). Some sites may

not be available depending on the information provider.

• The i-mode services may not be available depending

on the operator being used.

• Select a mobile phone carrier compatible with packet

transmission.

• For the latest information about overseas carriers

compatible with packet transmission, see the

International Service web page of DoCoMo.

• “i-mode” services offered by overseas carriers are not

available.

Contact (While outside Japan)

If the handset is lost or stolen, etc.

<DoCoMo Information Center> (24-hour service)

aUniversal Number

International Call ID Number for the Universal Number

(See Table 1)

– 800-0120-0151

Domestic call charges of the country you stay apply if you

make a call from a mobile phone.

aIf the Universal Number (above) is not available

International access code for the country of stay

(See Table 2)

– 81-3-5366-3114

Dialing charges for calls to Japan will apply.

Please be aware that you are charged for call fee incurred

after the phone or UIM is lost or stolen. Contact the

Information Center immediately after the loss and follow

the procedures to cancel the service.

If the Handset is not Working Properly

(24-hour service)

aUniversal Number

International Call ID Number for the Universal Number

(See Table 1)

– 800-5931-8600

Domestic call charges of the country you stay apply if you

make a call from a mobile phone.

aIf the Universal Number above is not available

International access code for the country of stay

(See Table 2)

– 81-3-6718-1414

Dialing charges for calls to Japan will apply.

229

Overseas Use

230

Overseas Use

Major Country Codes The International Call ID Numbers for the Universal

Number in Table 1 and international access codes in

Table 2 are subject to change.

Be careful that the Universal Number may be often

unavailable when making calls from mobile phones,

public phones or hotel phones.

International Call ID Number for the Universal

Number (Table 1)

Australia 0011

Austria 00

Belgium 00

Brazil 0021

Canada 011

China 00

Columbia 009

Denmark 00

Finland 990

France 00

Germany

Hong Kong

001

Luxembourg 00

Malaysia 00

Netherlands

New Zealand

Norway

Philippines

Singapore 001

South Korea 001

Spain 00

Sweden

Switzerland

Taiwan 00

Country/Region

Code

Argentina 00

Ireland 00

Country/Region

Code

Israel 014

Italy 00

Thailand 001

UK 00

USA 01

Country/Region

Code

Australia 61

Austria 43

Belgium 32

Brazil 55

Canada 1

China 86

Czech 420

Country/Region

Code

Egypt 20

Fiji 679

Finland 358

France 33

Germany 49

Greece 30

Hong Kong 852

Indonesia

Italy

Maldives 960

Netherlands 31

687

New Zealand 64

Norway

Peru

Singapore 65

India 91

South Korea 82

Spain 34

Sweden 46

Switzerland 41

Tahiti 689

Taiwan 886

Japan 81 USA 1

Philippines

Russia

Hungary 36

New Caledonia

Macao 853 Vietnam 84

Malaysia 60

Thailand 66

Turkey 90

UK 44

231

Overseas Use

Major International Access Codes (Table 2) Be careful that the Universal Number may be often

unavailable when making calls from mobile phones,

public phones or hotel phones.

Applying for WORLD WING

At DoCoMo e-site

aBy i-mode

“iMenu” ]“ ” ]“ e ”

aFrom a personal computer

My DoCoMo (http://www.mydocomo.com/)

]

Procedures (

)

You need to enter your “Network Security Code” for

application by i-mode.

You need to enter your “DoCoMo ID/Password” for

application from a personal computer.

DoCoMo e-site may not be available for the application

depending on the contracted contents.

By phone

aFrom DoCoMo mobile phone or PHS

151 (toll-free)

Not accessible from fixed-line phones, etc.

aFrom fixed-line phones, etc.

0120–800–000 (Japanese only)

Also accessible from a mobile phone or PHS.

Ireland 00

Australia 0011

India 00

Indonesia 001

Italy 00

Luxembourg 00

UAE 00

UK 00

USA 011

Country/Region

Code

Belgium 00

Brazil 0041

0021

0023

Country/Region

Code

Monaco 00

Netherlands 00

New Zealand 00

Norway

Philippines

Poland

Canada 011 00

China 00 00

Czech 00 Portugal 00

Denmark 00 Russia 810

00 Singapore 001

990 South Korea 001

France 00 Spain 00

Germany 00 Sweden 00

Greece 00 Switzerland 00

Hong Kong 001 Taiwan 002

Hungary

Malaysia

Thailand 001

Turkey 00

Macao 00

Vietnam 00

Philippine

Finland

232

Overseas Use

Make sure that you dial the correct number.

At DoCoMo Shop

Your local DoCoMo Shop accepts the application.

At the DoCoMo World Counter

Applications accepted even on the day of departure.

aDoCoMo World Counter Narita International Airport No.

1: 4F Central Building, Narita International Airport

Terminal 1

aDoCoMo World Counter Narita International Airport No.

2: B1F Main Building, Narita International Airport

Terminal 2

aDoCoMo World Counter Kansai International Airport: 4F

Kansai International Airport Terminal Building

aDoCoMo World Counter Central Japan International

Airport: Business Center P@tio, 3F Central Japan

International Airport Terminal Building

Processing the application may take time. Allow

sufficient time for application at the DoCoMo World

Counter.

For business hours, refer to “Network Services User's

Guide (Chapter of International Service)”.

How to Use WORLD CALL

aCheck the settings of “International Settings”

C[Menu] ]or “Settings” ]“Call feature” ]

“International dial” ]“IDD prefix setting”

• Set to use “009130010” for WORLD CALL.

aMaking

Display “+”

Country code

Area code

Other

party’s phone number

When you call a mobile phone, dial the mobile phone

number after the country code.

When the other party’s area code or mobile phone

number begins with 0, omit the zero when dialing

(This does not apply in some countries/regions).

233

Menu list ...............................................234

Pre-installed data .................................260

Symbol/Special Character List............264

Pictograph and Emoticon List .............265

Common Phrase List............................267

Kuten Code List....................................269

List of city in World time ......................278

Multiaccess Combination Patterns .....279

Multitask Combination Patterns..........280

Service Available with

FOMA Phones ......................................284

aConnecting with External Devices

Introduction of Data Link .....................285

aWhen You are in Trouble

Troubleshooting ...................................286

Error Messages ....................................288

Introduction of Options and Related

Equipment ............................................308

Warranty and Maintenance Services ..308

Specific Absorption Rate of the

Mobile Phone .......................................311

Export/Re-export regulations of

Japan and USA.....................................314

Appendix

234

Appendix

Menu list

• You can select the function by pressing the button corresponding with the number in the table below.

Appendix

i-appli

2 Image display

1 Character size

Pre-installed i-appli only

–

P159

No bookmarks

No screen memos

–

http://

No URL history

No messages

–

Enable/Disable

URL Address: http://

Small/Stadard/Large

ON/OFF

P120

P121

P122

P123

P127

1 iMenu

2 Bookmark

3 Screen memo

4 Last URL

1 Input address

2 URL history

1 MessageR

2 MessageF

7 Check new message

8 i-mode setting

1 Home

2 View

5 Go to location

6 Message

P128

P124

P125

i-mode P119

3 Scroll 1 line/3 lines/5 lines

Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)

Reference

235

Appendix

Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)

Reference

4 Message list disp.

–

ON/OFF

60 seconds/90 seconds/Unlimited

Mail/MessageR/MessageF (All marked)

–

P129

–

P198

P197

P199

4 Others

3 Certificates

2 i-motion auto play

1 Connection timeout

3 Check new message

5 Reset settings

4 Check settings

6 Reset data

NW Service

1 Voice mail

2 Set ringing time

1 Activate voice mail

3 Deactivate voice mail

4 Voice mail status request

5 Play messages

6 Voice mail setting

7 Check messages

8 Notify missed call

1 line/2 lines P128

Activate missed call notification

Deactivate missed call notification

3 Missed call notification status request

–

236

Appendix

Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)

Reference

P202

P203

3 Call forwarding

1 Activate call forwarding

3 Call waiting status request

2 Deactivate call waiting

1 Activate call waiting

2 Call waiting

–

2 Deactivate call forwarding

3 Register the forwarding number

4 Setting at forwarded party busy

5 Call forwarding status request

4 Nuisance call barring

1 Register nuisance caller

2 Delete all entries

3 Delete most recent entry

5 Caller ID notification

1 Activate/Deactivate caller ID notification

2 Caller ID notification status request

6 Caller ID request

P201

–

–P200

–

9 Delete voice mail icon

0 Set message alert ringer P199

–

1 Register fwd number

2 Set ringing time

1 Activate caller ID request

237

Appendix

Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)

Reference

Answer/Voice mail/Call forwarding/Call rejection

–

8 Arrival call act

–

3 Arrival act status request

2 Deactivate arrival act

1 Activate arrival act

9 Remote control

2 Deactivate remote control

3 Remote control status request

1 Voice mail (Int.)

2 Call forwarding (Int.)

3 Roaming guidance (Int.)

–

–3 Caller ID request status request

7 Set arrival act

P204

P203

10 International service

2 Deactivate voice mail

1 Activate voice mail

3 Play messages

4 Voice mail setting

1 Activate call forwarding

2 Deactivate call forwarding

2 Deactivate caller ID request

1 Activate remote control

11 Others

238

Appendix

No messages

3 Unsent message

Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)

Reference

Not recorded

–

Mail

1 Inbox

2 Outbox

2 Additional guidance

3 English guidance

4 Service dialing number

5 Call barring

None

No messages

1 Activate barring of

incoming call - roam

1 Barring all incoming calls

2 Data calls barring

Inbox

Folder created by user

No messages

P139

P137

P144

P147

P207

P205

P206

Outgoing+Incoming call/ Outgoing call/ Incoming call1 Guidance setting

2 Guidance status request

239

Appendix

Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)

Reference

None/1 day/2 days/3 days

Auto attach: Marked

Signature field: Not marked

Small/Standard/Large

1 line/3 lines/5 lines

ON/OFF

Image, Melody (All marked)

ON/OFF

Mail, MessageR, MessageF (All marked)

P156

5 SMS validity term

1 Edit signature

2 Edit quotation

1 Character size

2 Scroll

4 SMS report request

3 Check new message

2 Receive attach file

1 Receive opt. setting

1 Communication

2 Edit

3 View

P149

P154

P152

P155

4 Compose mail

–

1 Compose message

2 Compose SMS

5 Check new message

6 Receive option

7 Check new SMS

8 Mail setting

1 line subject/1 line address/1 line name/2 lines address/2 lines name

3 Mail list display

4 Folder security Inbox, Outbox, Unsent message (All unmarked)

240

Appendix

Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)

Reference

2 i-motion

3 Melody

Multimedia

1 Camera-mode

2 Movie-mode

ON/OFF

–

P156

P157

4 Others

1 Check settings

3 Reset data

2 Reset settings

5 Melody auto play

No data

None

Only preinstalled file

None

No data

Only preinstalled file

None

Camera, Data transfer, i-mode

Folder created by user

Item, Pre-installed

Camera, Data transfer, i-mode

Pre-installed

Folder created by user

Data transfer, i-mode

Pre-installed

Folder created by user

P176

P165

P107

P109

P115

P166

P173

1 My picture

Data box

P118

3 Camera settings

ON/OFF

Shutter 1/Shutter 2/Shutter 3

Auto/50Hz area/60Hz area

1 Saving option Auto saving

2 Shutter sound

3 Flicker tuning

241

Appendix

Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)

Reference

Phonebook

1 Add to phonebook

1 Show all data

2 Group search

3 Reading search

4 Memory No. search

Not registered

P191

Stationery

1 Scheduler

P189

P66

P64

P193

P194

P195

P63

Not registered

–

Not registered

4 Date counter

3 Date search

2 Memo

Schedule type

No alarm/On time/Before 15

mins/Before 30 mins/Before 1

hour/Before 1 day/Before 3

days/ Before 1 week

Alarm

Repeat

None/Private/Anniversary/Trip/

Work/Meeting

2 Search phonebook

Once/Daily/Mon~Fri/Sat~Sun/

Weekly/Monthly/Yearly

–

5 Phone No. search

P70

–

6 Domain search

3 No. of phonebook

242

Appendix

Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)

Reference

1. @docomo.ne.jp

2~10. Not registered

Show all data/Group search/Reading search/

Memory No. search/Phone No. search/Domain search

ON/OFF P71

1 Display data Handset only/UIM only

2 Create domain list

3 Search by

4 Display image

4 Phonebook settings

5 Group settings Group name: Group 1 - Group 30 (Not setting)

P70

6 Own number –

Tools

P72

P179

Not setting

ON/OFF

OFF/ON (Max Ring&Vib)

OFF/In 5 mins/In 10 mins/

In 30 mins/In 1 hour/

In 2 hours/In 4 hours/

In 8 hours/In 1 day/In 1 week

Once/Daily/Mon~ Fri/

Sat~Sun/Except holiday

(Snooze setting)

(Turbo Alarm)

(ON/OFF setting)

(Repetition setting)

1 Alarm

3 Receive Ir data – P184

P181

P180

2 Custom menu 1 Search phonebook, 2Mail, 3i-mode, 4Camera-mode,

5Alarm, 6Select ringtone, 7~10 Not registered

243

Appendix

Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)

Reference

4 Calculator –

P185

5 Unit converter

P186

P187

1 Currency (Yen) / (Dollar) /

(Euro) /

1 (Currency 1) /

2 (Currency 2) /

3 (Currency 3) /

4 (Currency 4)

Acre/Hectare/Square in/

Square feet/Square yd/

Square miles/Square mm/

Square cm/Square m/

Square km

mm, cm, m, km, inch, feet,

yard, mile

2 Surface

3 Length

Currency unit

Surface unit

Length unit

P184

mg, g, kg, ton, ounce, pound,

stone

Celsius/Fahrenheit

4 Weight

5 Temperature

Weight unit

Temperature unit

244

Appendix

2 Effect tone volume

Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)

Reference

P188, 278

P76

km/h, meter/sec, mile/h,

feet/sec

Tokyo

Level 0~7 (Level 3)

–

7 Velocity

6 World time

7 Stop watch

Sound

1 Ring volume

Velocity unit

Home setting

Voice call

Video-phone

Mail tone

MessageR tone

MessageF tone

SMS tone

–

Choose city

Key tone Level 0~7 (Level 3)

Power ON/OFF Level 0~7 (Level 3)

Level 0~7 (Level 3)Flip tone

Level 0~7 (Level 3)Feedback tone

Milliliter, Liter, Cubic mm,

Cubic cm, Cubic meter,

Cubic inch, Gallon, Liq.pt,

Liq.oz, Fluid oz, Barrel

6 Volume Volume unit

245

Appendix

Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)

Reference

Feedback tone

Incoming call

melody + vibration/Pattern 1 (Vibration

only)/Pattern 2 (Vibration only)/OFF

ON/OFF

Message

melody + vibration/Pattern 1 (Vibration

only)/Pattern 2 (Vibration only)/OFF

5 Vibration settings

3 Select ringtone

MessageF tone

SMS tone

Key tone

Power ON/OFF

Flip tone

MessageR tone

Mail tone

Video-phone

Voice call

P78

ON/OFF

4 Select effect tone

Sound off/Sound1/Sound 2/

Sound3

P77

Ring01.mid

Ring02.mid

Message02.mid

Message03.mid

Message04.mid

Message05.mid

OFF/Digital Tone/Japanese/

English/Korean

6 Manner settings Manner mode/Original manner mode

P79

1 Manner mode –

2 Original manner mode Incoming call sound ON/OFF

ON/OFF

Incoming call vib.

Message sound

Message vibration ON/OFF

246

Appendix

Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)

Reference

8 Set mute seconds 0 Sec.

P81

Display

1 Main display

2 Incoming call

3 Outgoing call

P75

P80

Time 3 Sec./Duration 1 Cycle

Select file: Vivid red.gif

Clock theme: Willy Willy

Clock: Digital 1/Digital 2/

Digital 3/Digital 4

Dual clock

Calendar + Clock

Not display

16 colors in total (black)

Mail ring duraiton

Wallpaper

Display items

Clock font color

Incoming_call_clean.gif

Outgoing_call_clean.gif

P79

P80

P82

7 Mail ring duration

Flip tone

Low battery tone

ON/OFF

Mail ring ON/OFF

ON/OFF

Key tone

1 Stand-by display

Wallpaper

Display items

Select file: Sub_vivid red.jpg

Clock theme: Tropical

Dual clock/Calendar+clock

2 Sub display

247

Appendix

Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)

Reference

Dial font size

Dial font color

List

Main display

Sub display

Keypad

3 Dial Font

4 Menu style

5 Backlight

Small/Large

Total 16 colors (Orange)

List

Grid

10 seconds/30 seconds/60 seconds/

120 seconds/180 seconds

100%/80%/60%/40%

10 seconds/30 seconds/60 seconds/

120 seconds/180 seconds

100%/80%/60%/40%

10 seconds/30 seconds/60 seconds/

120 seconds/180 seconds

P83

2 Incoming call

3 Outgoing call

Sub_incoming.gif

Sub_outgoing.gif P82

P84

6 Color scheme Green tea black/Cherry pink/Water drop blue/Ceramic white

7 LED Settings Lighting

Incoming voice call

ON/OFF

Pattern 10

(red/pink/blue/aqua/green

/yellow)

248

Appendix

Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)

Reference

P84

Incoming video call

Receiving mail

Receiving messageR

Receiving messageF

Receiving SMS

Playing music

Alarm

Pattern 10

(red/pink/blue/aqua/green

/yellow)

Pattern 9

(red/yellow/green)

Pattern 9

(yellow/pink/green)

Pattern 9

(green/yellow/blue)

Pattern 9

(blue/yellow/red)

Pattern 8

(aqua/white/pink)

Pattern 3 (aqua)

Pattern 4 (blue/red)

Schedule

Pattern 1 (aqua)

During a call

P86

P87

No record

1 Call/MAil history

1 Received calls

2 Dialed calls

3 All calls

Settings

1 Call/Answer

P85

249

Appendix

Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)

Reference

5 Answer mode

2 Call feature

1 Reconnect alarm

2 Quality alarm

3 Minute reminder

Press send key/Open flip/Press any key

P91

P92

P88

No record

2 Call duration

4 Received mails

5 Sent mails

6 All mails

Accept/Reject/Reject all calls/Memory reject call

Last call, Received calls, Dialed calls, All calls (00:00:00)

3 Auto answer

4 Reject/Accept call

P89

Auto answering

Delayed time

(SEC) (0 - 120)

ON/OFF

High alarm/Low alarm/No alarm

ON/OFF

5 International dial

6 Close setting

2 IDD prefix setting

Auto/OFF

WORLDCALL

009130010

IDD prefix name

IDD prefix code

End the call/Continue (Mute)

1 Auto assist setting

4 Prefix dial

P93

Not registeredPREFIX 2~3

PREFIX 1 009130010

250

Appendix

Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)

Reference

P95

Image

Image list

Image

Image list

Default image

/Selected image

Not setting

Default image

/Selected image

Not setting

Default image

/Selected image

1 Substitutive image

2 Response hold image

3 On-hold image

3 Video-phone

1 Video-phone settings

2 Image settings

VoiceCall AutoSwitch

Display setting

Sub screen

Send camera image

Sending img. quality

ON/OFF

Both/Other/Me

Me/Other

ON/OFF

Prefer image quality/Normal/Prefer motion quality

Display light

Hands_free V.phone

Always on/Terminal setting

ON/OFF

P94

P93

Hour indication OFF

2006.01.01

DD/MM/YYYY / MM/DD/YYYY /

YYYY/MM/DD

Set date

Date format

2 Set date

P96

4 Date & Time

1 Set time 00 : 00 : 00

Set time

12-hour/24-hourTime format

251

Appendix

Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)

Reference

3 Security code

0000

ON/OFF

P100

3 Change password

2 PIN code request 1

2 PIN2 code 1

1 PIN1 code 1

0000

/English

5 Network

6 Host selection

1 Network selection

2 Network mode

3 Preferred lists

4 Network name display

Auto/Manual

Auto/WCDMA only/GSM only

Depending on user's setting

Display on/Display off

i - mode

P97

P98

7 Security

Power on/Immediate/None P99

1 All lock

3 Daylight saving ON/OFF

P96

2 Personal info.

3 UIM memory

–

9 Others

1 Memory status

1 Data box – P101

252

Appendix

P102

2 Default settings

3 SMS center

4 Reset holiday

–

DoCoMo/Others

81903101652

SMSC

Address

–

2 Personal info.

Menu Item Setting Item (Blue color: Setting at purchase)

Reference

1: Settings of UIM takes precedence.

2: The setting is registered in FOMA phone and UIM, but if each setting is different, the setting of UIM takes precedence.

1 Clear memory

2 Reset settings

1 Data box

–

–P101

253

Appendix

Default List of the Submenu/Function Menu Items

Video-phone talking screen >P59

Phonebook list screen >P67

Setting ItemsItems / Function Name

X1/X2

High/Medium/Low

ON/OFF

Both/Other/Me

Me/Other

Always on/Terminal setting

Normal/Prefer motion quality/Prefer image quality

Camera settings

(Zoom)

(Brightness)

(Night mode)

Video phone settings

Display setting

Sub screen

Display light

Sending img. Quality

Setting ItemsItems / Function Name

Show all data/Group search/Reading search/Memory No. search/Phone No.

search/Domain search

ON/OFF

Search phonebook

Display image

254

Appendix

Still Image Finder Stand-by display >P112

Setting Items

No restriction/100KB/9KB

(File size restriction)

Super fine/Fine/Normal

OFF/3/6/9

Auto/Daylight/Cloudy/Incandescent/Fluorescent

ON/OFF

Choose frame/No frame

None/3 sec./5 sec./10 sec.

None/Black & White/Sepia/Negative

(Size)

(Upside down)

(Quality)

(Multishot)

(Zoom)

(Brightness)

(White balance)

(Night mode)

(Frame shot)

(Auto timer)

(Effect)

1280X1024/640X480/352X288/320X240/176X220/176X144/128X96/

Phonebook

Upside down

Submenu Items

255

Appendix

Still Image Display (After taking a multishot) >P113

Moving Image Display >P116

Setting ItemsSubmenu Item

Normal screen/Full screen

1 ~ 9 sec (s) (1)

Slide show settings

View as

Time interval (secs)

Sort by

Setting ItemsSubmenu Item

Super fine/Fine/Normal

Upside down

Auto/Daylight/ Cloudy/Incandescent/Fluorescent

ON/OFF

None/Black & White/Negative/Sepia

30 secs/1 min/2 mins/5 mins/30 mins/Mail attach

(Quality)

(Upside down)

(Zoom)

(Brightness)

(White balance)

(Night mode)

(Effect)

(Recording time)

Sound+Video/Video only/Sound only

(Type)

View by

Name/Date/Type

Simple list/Detailed list/Grid

256

Appendix

MessageR/F list screen >P126

Received mail list screen >P141

Sent mail list screen >P146

Setting ItemsItems / Function Name

Sort

Filter

Setting ItemsItems / Function Name

Sort

Filter

Setting ItemsItems / Function Name

Sort

Filter

Subject(asc.)/Subject(desc.)/Address(asc.)/Address(desc.)/Date(asc.)/

Date(desc.)

All/Unread/Read/Protected/Not protected/Pasted/Attached/i-mode mail/

SMS/SMS report

Subject(asc.)/Subject(desc.)/Address(asc.)/Address(desc.)/Date(asc.)/

Date(desc.)

All/Protected/Not protected/Attached/i-mode mail/SMS

Subject(asc.)/Subject(desc.)/Date(asc.)/Date(desc.)

All/Unread/Read/Protected/Not protected/Pasted/Attached

257

Appendix

Unsent mail list screen >P148

Software list screen >P161

Setting ItemsSubmenu Item

Sort

Network setting

i-appli To

Icon info setting

Set/Not set

Show desc setting

Setting ItemsSubmenu Item

Sort

Filter

Subject (asc.)/Subject (desc.)/Address (asc.)/Address (desc.)/Date (asc.)/

Date (desc.)

Name (asc.)/Name (desc.)/Exec time (asc.)/Exec time (desc.)/

Create time (asc.)/Create time (desc.)/S/W size (asc.)/S/W size (desc.)/

Exec count (asc.)/Exec count (desc.)

Show/Don't show

All/Attached/i-mode mail/SMS

Autostart setting

Yes/No/Check every start

Yes/No

258

Appendix

Still image saving screen >P114/moving image saving screen >P117/Image folder list screen >P168/Image file

list screen >P168/Image display screen >P170

Image edit screen >P171

Setting ItemsSubmenu Item

Slide show settings

Settings

Normal screen/Full screen

View as

1 sec ~ 9 secs (1 sec)

Time interval (secs)

Name/Date/Type

Simple list/Detailed list/GridView by

Sort by

Setting ItemsSubmenu Item

Resizing

Insert

Text

640x480/320x240/160x120/Wallpaper size/Phonebook size/Sub display size

Frame

Element

Clipping

>Text focus (P251)

>Frame (P250)

>Stamp (P251)

1280X960/640X480/320X240/160X120/Wallpaper size/Phonebook size

User-defined size

Effect Black & White/Sepia/Negative/Black & White negative/Color balance/Contrast/

Sharpness/Softness/Mosaic Blur

259

Appendix

Moving image folder list screen >P174/i-motion file list screen >P174/Moving image playback screen >P175

Melody folder list screen >P177/Melody file list screen >P177/Melody playback screen >P177

Setting ItemsSubmenu Item

Player settings

Spectrum analy/Dancing notes

Visual effect

Pink/Blue/Violet

Volume

Setting ItemsSubmenu Item

Name/Date/Type

Sort by

None/Current file/All files/Shuffle

Set repeat

Player setting

Spectrum analy/Dancing notes

Visual effect

Pink/Blue/Violet

Player skin

Volume

Sort by

View by

Name/Date/Type

Simple list/Detailed list/Grid

View by Simple list/Detailed list/Grid

OFF~Level 7 (Level3)

Player skin (Color)

OFF~Level 7 (Level3)

260

Appendix

Pre-installed data

In Stand-by mode

aMain display

aSub-display

Ceramic.jpg Vivid blue.jpg Vivid red.jpgSakura.jpg Waterdrop.jpgGreen tea.jpg

Sub_ceramic.jpg Sub_green tea.jpg Sub_sakura.jpg Sub_vivid red.jpgSub_vivid blue.jpg Sub_waterdrop.jpg

261

Appendix

The screen for receiving/making a call

aMain display

aSub display

Sub_incoming.gif Sub_outgoing.gif

Ceramic_in_calling.gif

Incoming_call.gif Sakura_in_calling.gif

Ceramic_out_calling.gif

Sakura_out_calling.gif

Green_in_calling.gif

Outgoing_call.gif

Waterdrop_in_calling.gif

Green_out_calling.gif

Waterdrop_out_calling.gif

262

Appendix

Frame

• The frame including of multiple file sizes can be different to view depending on file size.

• The frames enclosed in the lines below can be selected by “Frame Shot” in “Using the Submenus of the Still Image Finder

Stand-by Screen” (P112).

• The displayed frame differs depending on the size of the image to be edited.

263

Appendix

Element

• Appearances may differ depending on file size.

Text focus

i-motion

Information

• i-motions on the left are 3D-sound-supported i-motions,

but as this FOMA phone does not support 3D-sound,

they are not played with 3D-sound.

List of melody

• The copyright of each melody belongs to LG electronic

Japan, Inc.

Melody title Melody title

Air on The G String.mid

Alarm01

Alarm03.mid

An der schonen blauen donau.mid

Beautiful Life.mid

Blues Mania.mid

Brandenburg Concertos.mid

Cave No.31.mid

Czardas.mid

Dark Valley.mid

Driving Bayside.mid

Energetic Today.mid

Funny Funky.mid

Green Park.mid

Happy Birthday to you.mid

Hunter G.mid

If I Could.mid

Jasmine.mid

Jingle Bell.mid

Menueti.mid

Message01 ~ Message12.mid

Moonlight.mid

Musette.mid

Play Dominoes.mid

Ring01

Ring05.mid

Secrect Of Nature.mid

Swan Lake.mid

Touch Of Light.mid

Wedding Martch.mid

Welcome My Friend.mid

Winter.mid

DiMAGIC eco-motion.3gp

264

Appendix

Symbol/Special Character List

aFull-pitch symbol

Special Characters

Information

• Special characters may not be correctly displayed if they are sent to mobile phones or personal computers that do not support

i-mode mail.

Full symbol (8/8)

Full symbol (7/8)

Full symbol (6/8)

Full symbol (5/8)

Full symbol (4/8)

Full symbol (3/8)

Full symbol (2/8)

Full symbol (1/8)

265

Appendix

aHalf-pitch symbol

Pictograph and Emoticon List

Pictograph List

aPictograph1

aPictograph2

Pictograph1 (6/6)

Pictograph1 (5/6)

Pictograph1 (4/6)

Pictograph1 (3/6)

Pictograph1 (2/6)

Pictograph1 (1/6)

Half symbol

266

Appendix

Emoticon List

Information

• For the method of entering pictographs and emoticons, see “Switching Pictograph/Symbol/Emoticon” (P217).

Category

Happy

Cry

Chill

Expressions Category

Angry

Sweat

Surprise

Expressions Category

Embarrass

Greeting

Other

Expressions

267

Appendix

Common Phrase List

Category

Internet folder

Greeting folder

Phrase Category

Greeting folder

Business folder

Private folder

Phrase

268

Appendix

Category

Private folder

Reply folder

Pictograph

idiom folder

Category

Pictograph

idiom folder

Original folder

Phrase

You can enter your own phrase from 1 to 0.

(Glad)

(OK)

(Lovely)

(Hello)

(Waiting a call)

(Happy)

(Angry)

(Christmas)

(Return)

( ? )

269

Appendix

Kuten Code List

To enter a Kuten Code, first enter the 3-digit number for “Kuten digits 1 to 3” and enter the 1-digit number for

“Kuten digit 4”

• Some characters in Kuten Code List may appear different from those on the display.

Kuten

digit

1 to 3

Kuten digit 4 Kuten digit 4 Kuten digit 4

Kuten

digit

1 to 3

Kuten

digit

1 to 3

270

Appendix

Kuten

digit

1 to 3

Kuten digit 4 Kuten digit 4 Kuten digit 4

Kuten

digit

1 to 3

Kuten

digit

1 to 3

LG Electronics USA L602I PCS GSM Phone User Manual L601i E 047 056

LG Electronics USA PCS GSM Phone L601i E 047 056

Contents

Users Manual 1

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation